California Proposition 65 Warning
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 0 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
00X31-T3W-6200 2017 Accord Hybrid (FHEV) AOM03792
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol
3
and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 1 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 33
For Safe Driving P. 34 Seat Belts P. 38 Airbags P. 45
2 Instrument Panel P. 73
Indicators P. 74 Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 98
2 Controls P. 117
Clock P. 118 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 120
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
P. 140
Adjusting the Seats P. 160
2 Features P. 183
Audio System P. 184 Audio System Basic Operation P. 190, 213
Customized Features P. 295, 314 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
P. 338
2 Driving P. 409
Before Driving P. 410 Towing a Trailer P. 415
Refueling P. 482 Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions P. 484
2 Maintenance P. 485
Before Performing Maintenance P. 486 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 489
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 514
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 527
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 535
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 536 Power System Won’t Start P. 545
Overheating P. 551 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 554
2 Information P. 563
Specifications P. 564 Identification Numbers P. 566
Emissions Testing P. 569 Warranty Coverages P. 571
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 2 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Contents
Child Safety P. 58 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 70 Safety Labels P. 71
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 130 Security System P. 134 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 137
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 141 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 158
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 167 Climate Control System P. 179
Audio Error Messages P. 283 General Information on the Audio System P. 288
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 340, 371
When Driving P. 416 Braking P. 463 Parking Your Vehicle P. 475
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 493 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 506
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 516 12-Volt Battery P. 525 Remote Transmitter Care P. 526
Cleaning P. 528 Accessories and Modifications P. 533
Jump Starting P. 548 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 550
Fuses P. 558 Emergency Towing P. 561
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 567 Reporting Safety Defects P. 568
Authorized Manuals P. 573 Customer Service Information P. 574
Quick Reference Guide
P. 4
Safe Driving
P. 33
Instrument Panel
P. 73
Controls
P. 117
Features
P. 183
Driving
P. 409
Maintenance
P. 485
Handling the Unexpected
P. 535
Information
P. 563
Index
P. 575
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 3 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
4
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
❙
System Indicators
(P 74)
❙
Gauges
(P 98)
❙
POWER Button
(P 141)
❙
Rear Window Defogger
(P 154)
❙
Front Seat Heater Switches
*
(P 177)
❙
ECON Button
(P 424)
❙
Multi-Information Display
(P 100)
❙
Heated Mirror Button
(P 154)
❙
Audio/Information Screen
(P 191, 214)
❙
Center Pocket
(P 170)
❙
Climate Control System
(P 179)
❙
Hazard Warning Button
❙
Navigation System
*
() See Navigation System Manual
❙
Audio System
(P 190, 213)
❙
Audio Information Touch Screen
*
(P 216)
❙
Auxiliary Input Jack
*
(P 186)
❙
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System Button
*
(P 426)
❙
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button
(P 455)
❙
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) OFF Button
(P 467)
❙
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button
(P 443)
❙
Parking Sensor System Button
*
(P 476)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 4 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
5
Quick Reference Guide
❙
(+
/
(-
/ / Buttons
(P 188)
❙
SOURCE Button
(P 188)
❙
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons
(P 340, 371)
❙
Navigation System Voice Control Buttons
*
(P 233)
,
() See Navigation System Manual
❙
Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P 157)
❙
SEL/RESET Button
(P 101)
❙
(Information) Buttons
(P 100)
❙
Wipers/Washers
(P 151)
❙
Brightness Control
(P 153)
❙
(Select/Reset) Knob
(P 153)
❙
Horn (Press an area around .)
❙
(Display) Button
(P 191, 214, 216)
❙
LaneWatch
TM
(P 456)
❙
Headlights/Turn Signals
(P 144)
❙
Fog Lights
(P 146)
❙
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons
(P 429)
❙
Interval Button
(P 437)
❙
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button
(P 447)
❙
MENU Button
*
(P 188)
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 5 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Door Mirror Controls
(P 159)
❙
Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 48)
❙
Parking Brake
(P 463)
❙
Glove Box
(P 169)
❙
Rearview Mirror
(P 158)
❙
Hood Release Handle
(P 494)
❙
Power Door Lock Master Switch
(P 128)
❙
Power Window Switches
(P 137)
❙
Interior Fuse Box
(P 559)
❙
Driver's Front Airbag
(P 48)
❙
Trunk Main Switch
(P 132)
❙
Fuel Fill Door Release Handle
(P 483)
❙
Trunk Release
(P 130)
❙
Transmission Shift Lever
(P 422)
❙
SPORT Button
(P 425)
❙
USB Port
(P 185)
❙
Accessory Power Socket
(P 172)
❙
Wireless Charger
*
(P 173)
❙
EV Button
(P 13)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 6 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
7
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat
(P 67)
❙
Sun Visors
❙
Vanity Mirrors
❙
Map Lights
(P 168)
❙
Front Seat
(P 160)
❙
Seat Belts
(P 38)
❙
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat
(P 63)
❙
Side Curtain Airbags
(P 54)
❙
Grab Handle
❙
Ceiling Light
(P 167)
❙
Coat Hook
(P 175)
❙
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat)
(P 65)
❙
Rear Seat
❙
Accessory Power
Socket
(P 172)
❙
Side Airbags
(P 52)
❙
Sunglasses Holder
(P 176)
❙
Moonroof Switch
*
(P 140)
❙
USB Port
*
(P 185)
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 7 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Visual Index
8
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Maintenance Under the Hood
(P 493)
❙
Windshield Wipers
(P 151, 514)
❙
Tires
(P 516, 536)
❙
Door Lock/Unlock Control
(P 122)
❙
Power Door Mirrors
(P 159)
❙
Headlights
(P 144, 506)
❙
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
(P 144, 150, 510)
❙
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights
(P 144, 510)
❙
Fog Lights
(P 146, 508)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 8 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
9
Quick Reference Guide
❙
How to Refuel
(P 483)
❙
High-Mount Brake Light
(P 513)
❙
Emergency Trunk Release Lever
(P 133)
❙
Opening/Closing the Trunk
(P 130)
❙
Multi-View Rear Camera
(P 480)
❙
Trunk Release Button
(P 131)
❙
Back-Up Lights
(P 512)
❙
Taillights
(P 512)
❙
Brake/Taillights
(P 511)
❙
Rear Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights
(P 511)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 9 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
10
Quick Reference Guide
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi Mode
Drive)
Your SPORT HYBRID i-MMD vehicle uses both an electric motor and a gasoline engine as propulsion sources, with the electric motor
receiving electricity from an internal High Voltage battery or internal generator. The High Voltage battery can be charged from the
generator driven by the engine or regenerative braking.
When driving, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively by the gasoline engine, or by a combination of the two.
The system selects which propulsion source is most appropriate and automatically switches to it. Under certain circumstances, pressing the
EV button can manually enable EV (driven only on electricity) mode.
● Energy efficiency
As with a gasoline-powered vehicle, hybrid vehicle fuel efficiency and driving range is most impacted by your driving style. Aggressive
acceleration and high-speed driving can easily trigger the system to switch the propulsion source to the gasoline-powered engine.
In addition, heavy climate control system use negatively affects vehicle range and efficiency. Either of these use patterns will more quickly
reduce the High Voltage battery's state of charge.
● Battery types
There are two types of batteries used in this vehicle; a standard 12-volt battery that powers the airbags, the interior and exterior lights, and
other standard 12-volt systems; and a high voltage battery that is used to power the propulsion motor and recharge the 12-volt battery.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 10 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
11
Quick Reference Guide
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS
Gasoline Engine
– Provides propulsion to drive the wheels
under certain driving conditions, and turns the generator.
Generator
– Starts the engine and generates electric power
when driven by the gasoline engine to supply electricity to
power the electric motor and/or to charge the High Voltage
battery.
Electric Motor
– Provides propulsion to drive the wheels in
conjunction with the gasoline engine in certain conditions, and
provides electricity to the High Voltage battery through
regenerative braking.
High Voltage Battery
– Provides electrical storage and serves
as a power source for the electric motor.
Learning about the High Voltage battery’s characteristics will
help you get the best handling and maximize the range of your
electric vehicle. (P462)
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Indicator
– Displays
battery state of charge.
When the indicator:
•
Displays two or less segments, EV mode is no longer available.
•
Displays eight segments, battery charge level is full.
High
Voltage
Battery
Generator & Electric Motor
Gasoline Engine
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 11 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
12
Quick Reference Guide
Operating
mode
Electric Vehicle (EV) Hybrid (HV) Engine (Direct Drive) Regeneration
Vehicle
Speed
Stopped or driven at low speeds:
●
Only the electric motor
provides propulsion to the
wheels.
Driven in high-load conditions
(e.g., when accelerating, going
uphill):
●
The Electric Motor provides
propulsion to the wheels.
●
The gasoline engine drives the
generator, supplying
electricity to the electric
motor for added propulsion
or to the High Voltage battery
for charging.
Driven in high-speed, low-load
conditions:
●
The gasoline engine provides
propulsion to the wheels.
●
The High Voltage battery
supplies electricity to the
electric motor for added
propulsion.
●
The electric motor provides
electricity to the High Voltage
battery through regenerative
braking.
Decelerating, without
accelerator being depressed.
●
The electric motor provides
electricity to the High Voltage
battery through regenerative
braking.
Power Flow
Monitor
Electric Motor
Stopped/Running Running Generating/Running Regenerating
Generator Stopped Generating No Output Stopped/No Output
Gasoline
Engine
Stopped Running Running Stopped/No Output
Battery Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging
Vehicle
Speed
Time
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 12 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
13
Quick Reference Guide
EV Button
EV mode is enabled by pressing the EV button near the shift lever.
The EV mode indicator comes on in the instrument panel when EV
mode is enabled.
Press the EV button again to switch back to HV mode.
Some conditions, such as a low High Voltage battery level and a
high vehicle speed, may keep the system from manually switching
into EV mode. The beeper sounds and a message appears on the
multi-information display with the button pressed when EV mode is
disabled.
Shifts in vehicle, driving or road conditions may automatically
cancel EV mode and switch back to HV mode.
A message will appear on the multi-information display and EV mode may be canceled automatically when:
● The High Voltage battery charge level is low.
● Your vehicle speed is too high.
● Your vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h) while the engine is in warming-up operation.
● You fully depress the accelerator pedal.
● You are driving on hilly road.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages (P88)
In EV mode, the acoustic vehicle alerting system is on.
2 Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (P426)
Press
Canadian models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 13 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
14
Quick Reference Guide
● Regenerative Energy and Regenerative Braking
When decelerating without the accelerator being depressed or the brake pedal being applied, or
while driving downhill, the electric motor acts as a generator that recovers a portion of the
electrical energy that was used to accelerate the vehicle. This regenerative braking slows the
vehicle in a manner similar to engine braking in a gasoline-powered vehicle. This function is
enhanced when the shift lever is moved to .
● Auto Engine Stop/Start
Your vehicle's gasoline engine automatically stops running during vehicle operation or restarts while the vehicle is stationary when it is
appropriate.
In the following cases, however, auto engine stop may not activate.
•
The vehicle momentarily needs additional power for aggressive acceleration, or driving uphill or at high speed.
•
The climate control system is in heavy use.
•
The High Voltage battery temperature is high or low.
● Sounds Unique to the SPORT HYBRID i-MMD System
When you first start driving this vehicle, you likely will hear some unfamiliar sounds, particularly when you first turn on the power system,
while driving, and just after parking. Some of these sounds are unique to this vehicle‘s powertrain, fuel, and climate control systems; others
are similar to sounds generated by conventional automobiles that typically are masked by louder noises absent from a vehicle of this design.
These sounds are not a cause for concern, and you will soon recognize them as normal and thus be able to detect any new or unusual noise
should one develop.
When regenerative braking is in
operation
Motor
High
Voltage
Battery
B
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 14 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
15
Quick Reference Guide
Safety Precautions
Do not touch the High Voltage system
Attempting to take a High Voltage system component apart or disconnect one of its wires
can cause severe electrical shock. If the High Voltage system needs maintenance or repair, it
should be performed at a dealer.
If a crash occurs
●Be careful of electric shock hazard.
uIf a severe crash damages your vehicle’s High Voltage system, there is a possibility of
electrical shock due to exposed High Voltage components or wires. If this happens, do not
touch any of the High Voltage system components or any of its orange wires.
●Avoid contact with High Voltage battery fluid.
uThe High Voltage battery contains a flammable electrolyte that could leak as a result of
a severe crash. Avoid any skin or eye contact with the electrolyte as it is corrosive. If you
accidentally touch it, flush your eyes or skin with a large quantity of water for at least five
minutes, and seek medical attention immediately.
●Use a fire extinguisher for an electrical fire.
uAttempting to extinguish an electrical fire with a small quantity of water, from a garden
hose for instance, can be dangerous.
●Anytime the vehicle is damaged in an accident, have it repaired by a dealer.
Emergency Shutdown System for the High Voltage System
The emergency shutdown system may activate when the vehicle is impacted by some
incident such as a crash. When this system activates, the High Voltage system automatically
shuts down, and your vehicle no longer will move under its own power. To return the High
Voltage system back to normal operation, consult a dealer.
Honda collects and recycles High Voltage batteries used in its vehicles – consult a dealer for
more information.
Do not cover the air intake.
If the air intake is obstructed
during vehicle operation, the High
Voltage battery can become too
hot. To protect the battery, the
system may start to limit the
battery’s output and cause the
power system and 12-volt battery
charging system indicators to come
on.
Air Intake
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 15 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
16
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist® System
(P 424)
Ambient Meter
● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Blue green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
Blue: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.
ECON Button
(P 424)
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator
(P 83)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
The message is displayed for a few seconds
when the ECON button is pressed.
Ambient Meter
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 16 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
17
Quick Reference Guide
Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
● Comes on when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Eco Drive Display
(P105)
● Keep the vehicle icon near the center of the circle.
Aggressive
Deceleration
Fuel economy is:
Best
Drive
Cycle
Score
Lifetime Points
Worse WorseBetter Better
Moderate
Deceleration
Slow
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Aggressive
Acceleration
Moderate
Acceleration
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 17 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
18
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving
(P 33)
Airbags
(P 45)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety
(P 58)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard
(P 70)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist
(P 37)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts
(P 38)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 18 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
19
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel
(P 73)
Canada
U.S.
Low Fuel Indicator
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Canada
U.S.
READY Indicator
System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
12-Volt Battery
Charging System
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator
Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
EV Indicator
POWER/CHARGE
Gauge
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Shift Lever Position
Indicator
Gauges
(P 98)
/Multi-Information Display
(P 100)
/System Indicators
(P 74)
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
System Indicators
High Voltage Battery
Charge Level Gauge
POWER SYSTEM
Indicator
Smart Entry System
Indicator
System Message
Indicator
ECON mode
Indicator
Road Departure Mitigation
(RDM) Indicator
Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) Indicator
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
EV Mode Indicator
System Indicators
Multi-Information Display
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Indicator (Green/Amber)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Indicator (Green/Amber)
SPORT Mode
Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Auto High-Beam
Indicator (Green)
*
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 19 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
20
Quick Reference Guide
Controls
(P 117)
Clock
(P 118)
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
a
Select , then select Settings.
b
Select Clock/Info, then Clock
Adjustment.
c
Adjust the hours and minutes by
selecting / .
d
Select OK to set the time.
Models with navigation system
Models with two displays
3
4
a
Enter the Clock Adjustment screen.
2 Adjusting the Clock (P 118)
b
Rotate to change hour, then press
.
c
Rotate to change minute, then
press .
Models with one display
POWER Button
(P 141)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 20 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
21
Quick Reference Guide
Turn Signals
(P 144)
Lights
(P 144)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers
(P 151)
*1:Vehicle with auto wiper
*2:Vehicle without auto wiper
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
(-: Low Sensitivity
*1
(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps
*2
(+: High Sensitivity
*1
(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps
*2
MIST
OFF
AUTO
*1
: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT
*2
: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Steering Wheel
(P 157)
● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P 126)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 21 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
22
Quick Reference Guide
Trunk
(P 130)
● To unlock and open the trunk:
• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button on the remote
transmitter or the smart entry remote.
• Press the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
Trunk Release
Power Door Mirrors
(P 159)
● With the power mode in ON, move the
selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows
(P 137)
● With the power mode in ON, open and
close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger's window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button
Window
Switch
Indicator
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 22 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
23
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System
(P 179)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. (P 233)
Models with navigation system
Driver’s Side
Temperature Control
Buttons
(Windshield Defroster) Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
Air flows from floor and windshield
defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and dashboard
vents, and back of the center console.
Air flows from dashboard vents and
back of the center console.
AUTO Button
(On/Off) Button
(Recirculation) Button
MODE Control Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Buttons
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 23 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
24
Quick Reference Guide
Features
(P 183)
Audio Remote Controls
(P 188)
●
(+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
FMAMCDUSBiPod
Bluetooth® AudioPandora®
*
AUX
FMAMSiriusXM®
*
CDUSBiPod
Pandora®
*
Bluetooth® AudioAudio
Apps
(+ / (- / / Button
SOURCE
Button
Models with one display
Models with two displays
● / Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 24 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
25
Quick Reference Guide
Audio System
(P 190, 213)
(P 190)
Models with one display
Audio/Information Screen
BACK Button
FM/AM Button
(Skip/Seek) Button
Selector Knob
(Day/Night) Button
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
CD Button
AUX Button
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)
SETTINGS Button
(Skip/Seek) Button
PHONE Button
MENU Button
DISP Button
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 25 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
26
Quick Reference Guide
(Power) Button
(HOME) Icon
VOL (Volume)
Icons
(MENU) Icon
(BACK) Icon
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Audio/Information Screen
App List
(P213)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Models with two displays
MAP
*
*
(Day/Night) Button
(CD Eject) Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 26 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
27
Quick Reference Guide
Driving
(P 409)
Transmission
(P 422)
● Shift to
(P and depress the brake pedal when turning on the power.
● Shifting
Park
Used when parking or turning the power on or off.
Neutral
Propulsion power is not transmitted to wheels.
Drive (B)
● Used when driving down a long hill.
● Used to increase regenerative braking.
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of
(P.
Press the release button to move
the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Drive
Used for normal driving.
Shift Lever
Release Button
READY Indicator
On: You can start to drive.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 27 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
28
Quick Reference Guide
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®)
(P 454)
● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you turn on the power system.
Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) OFF Button
(P 467)
● When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBS
TM
can help you to
reduce the vehicle speed and the severity
of the collision.
● To turn the CMBS
TM
on or off, press and
hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
(P 458)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you turn on the power system.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
Refueling
(P 482)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87
or higher
Fuel tank capacity: 14.8 US gal (56 L)
a
Push the fuel fill
door release
handle.
b
Turn the fuel fill
cap slowly to
remove the cap.
c
Place the cap in
the holder on the
fuel fill door.
d
After refueling,
screw the cap
back on until it
clicks at least
once.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 28 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
29
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance
(P 485)
Under the Hood
(P 493)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, inverter coolant, and
windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the 12-volt battery condition monthly.
a
Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b
Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
c
When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights
(P 506)
● Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades
(P 514)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires
(P 516)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 29 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
30
Quick Reference Guide
Handling the Unexpected
(P 535)
Flat Tire
(P 536)
● Park in a safe location and repair the flat
tire using the tire repair kit in the trunk.
Indicators Come On
(P 554)
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Power System Won't
Start
(P 545)
● If the 12-volt battery is dead, jump start
using a booster battery.
Blown Fuse
(P 558)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating
(P 551)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the power system cool down.
Emergency Towing
(P 561)
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 30 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
31
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
The power mode does not
change from VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) to ACCESSORY.
Why?
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the POWER button at the same time.
The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to
(P
.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in
the lock position. If so, open the
rear door with the outside door
handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the unlock position.
Canadian models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 31 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
32
Quick Reference Guide
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?
The beeper sounds when:
●
The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when:
●
Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
●
The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 32 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
33
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 34
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 36
Safety CheckList................................. 37
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 38
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 41
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 44
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 45
Types of Airbags ................................ 48
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 48
Side Airbags ...................................... 52
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 54
Airbag System Indicators.................... 55
Airbag Care ....................................... 57
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 58
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......60
Safety of Larger Children ................... 68
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 70
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 71
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 33 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
34
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 34 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
35
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 35 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
36
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Side Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
7
7
99
8
8
10
10
6
11
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 36 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
37
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety CheckList
Safe Driving
Safety CheckList
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 126
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 163
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 41
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 58
1Safety CheckList
If the Door Open or Door And Trunk Open
message appears on the multi-information display, a
door and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close
all doors and the trunk tightly until the message
disappears.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 88
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 37 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
38
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 65
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
the belt to extend fully without locking.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 38 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
39
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the power mode is set to ON before the
driver's seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver
does not fasten the belt before the beeper
stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver’s and/or the front passenger’s seat belt
is fastened.
■
Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound. The indicator also may not come on and the
beeper may not sound when the occupant is not
heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such
occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should
be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag
likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 58
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 39 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
40
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
■
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 40 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
41
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Continued
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 41 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
42
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt as
low as
possible
■
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
Push
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 42 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
43
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■
Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
•
When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
•
When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 43 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
44
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 44 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
45
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
6
7
8
9
8
8
8
8 810
11
12
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 45 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
46
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
a
Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b
Two side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
c
Two side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
d
An electronic control unit that, when the
vehicle is on, continually monitors
information about the various impact
sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover
sensor, airbag activators, seat belt
tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event the
unit records such information.
e
Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In
addition, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.
f
A driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
g
Weight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
h
Impact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
i
An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.
j
An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k
Safing Sensor
l
A rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 46 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
47
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■
Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 47 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
48
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-
threshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 48 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
49
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■
Operation
■
How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 49 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
50
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■ When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 50 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
51
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Although we recommend against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger's front airbag.
■
Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
•
Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
•
Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
•
Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
•
All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
•
Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
P. 56
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 51 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
52
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger
seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing
Location
■
Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 52 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
53
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 53 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
54
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and any passengers
during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this
vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover
crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if
there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 54 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
55
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the multi-information display.
■ When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
■
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 55 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
56
Safe Driving
■ When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 58
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
■
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors, such as:
•
An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
•
A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
•
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
•
The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
•
An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S. Canada
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 56 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
57
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda
Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda
Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 57 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
58
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 58 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
59
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
Safe Driving
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 71
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 59 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
60
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 45
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 60 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 61 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
62
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■
Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 62 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
Flexible Type
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 63 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
64
Safe Driving
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook to the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 64 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
65
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
■
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 65 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
66
Safe Driving
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 66 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
67
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
Tether Anchorage Points
Cover
Anchor
Outer Position
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
Center Position
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 67 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
68
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■
Protecting Larger Children
■
Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 68 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
69
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■
Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 69 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
70
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not turn the power system on with the garage
door closed. Even when the garage door is open,
drive out of the garage immediately after turning the
power system on.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 70 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
71
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models Canadian models
Radiator
Cap
U.S. models only
Dashboard
High Voltage System Components
U.S. models Canadian models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 71 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
72
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 72 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
73
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 74
Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 88
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges.............................................. 98
Multi-Information Display ................ 100
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 73 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
74
Instrument Panel
Indicators
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off if the parking brake
has been released.
●
Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
●
Comes on when the brake fluid
level is low.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system.
●
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
●
Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator
comes on while driving P. 556
●
Comes on along with the brake
system indicator (amber) - Immediately
stop in a safe place. Contact a dealer for
repair. The brake pedal becomes harder
to operate. Depress the pedal further
than you normally do.
●
Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 556
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with a system related to braking
other than the conventional brake
system.
●
Stays on constantly - Avoid high speeds
and sudden braking. Take the vehicle to a
dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 74 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
75
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
POWER
SYSTEM
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the electric vehicle system.
●
Comes on when the High Voltage
battery temperature becomes high
while the battery is being charged.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
READY Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on when the vehicle is
ready to drive.
2 Turning on the Power P. 416
EV Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on when the vehicle is
moved by the motor, and the
engine is not operating.
— —
EV Mode
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on when the vehicle is in EV
mode.
2 SPORT HYBRID i-MMD
(intelligent Multi Mode
Drive) P. 10
—
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 75 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
76
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
●
Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 554
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off either
when the power system is on or
after several seconds if the vehicle
did not start. If “readiness codes”
have not been set, it blinks five
times before it goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the emissions control system.
●
Blinks when a misfire in the
engine's cylinders is detected.
●
Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 569
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the power system for 10
minutes or more, and wait for the engine
to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a
dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 555
12-Volt Battery
Charging System
Indicator
●
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when
the power system is on.
●
Comes on when the 12-volt
battery is not charging.
●
Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger
in order to reduce electricity
consumption.
2 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging
System Indicator Comes On P. 554
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 76 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
77
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Shift Lever
Position Indicator
●
Indicates the current shift lever
position.
2 Shifting P. 422
—
Transmission
Indicator
●
Blinks if the transmission system
has a problem.
●
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
SPORT Mode
Indicator
●
Comes on when you press the
SPORT button.
2 SPORT Mode P. 425
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●
Comes on and the beeper sounds
if you are not wearing a seat belt
when you set the power mode to
ON.
●
If the front passenger is not
wearing a seat belt, the indicator
comes on a few seconds later.
●
Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not
fastened a seat belt. The beeper
sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
●
The beeper stops and the indicator goes
off when you and the front passenger
fasten their seat belts.
●
Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat belt
- A detection error may have occurred in
the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 39
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 77 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
78
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Low Fuel
Indicator
●
Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 2.2 U.S.
gal./8.2 Liter left).
●
Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
●
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
as possible.
●
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●
If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. With this
indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-lock
function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
P. 465
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●
Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 78 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
79
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●
Blinks when VSA® is active.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 454
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) OFF
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●
Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
2 VSA® OFF Button P. 455
—
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
●
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
power system is on.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the EPS system.
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 556
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 79 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
80
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●
May come on briefly if the power
mode is set to ON and the vehicle is
not moved within 45 seconds, to
indicate the calibration process is
not yet complete.
●
Comes on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been
calibrated.
●
Comes on while driving - Stop in a
safe place, check tire pressures, and
inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
●
Stays on after the tires are inflated
to the recommended pressures - The
system needs to be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 458
●
Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS.
●
Blinks and remains on - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 80 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
81
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
System
Message
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you set
the power mode to ON, then goes off.
●
Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system message on
the multi-information display appears at
the same time.
●
While the indicator is on, press the
(information) button to see the
message again.
●
Refer to the Indicators information in
this chapter when a system message
appears on the multi-information
display. Take the appropriate action for
the message.
●
The multi-information display does not return
to the normal screen unless the warning is
canceled, or the button is pressed.
—
Turn Signal
and Hazard
Warning
Indicators
●
Blinks when you operate the turn signal
lever.
●
Blink along with all turn signals when you
press the hazard warning button.
●
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
turn signal light bulb has blown.
Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 510, 511
—
High Beam
Indicator
●
Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on.
— —
Lights On
Indicator
●
Comes on whenever the light switch is on,
or in AUTO when the exterior lights are
on.
●
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK) while the exterior lights are
on, a chime sounds when the driver's
door is opened.
—
Fog Light
Indicator
●
Comes on when the fog lights are on.
— —
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 81 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
82
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Immobilizer
System Indicator
●
Comes on briefly when you set the
power mode to ON, then goes off.
●
Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
●
Blinks - You cannot start the power
system. Set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK), then select ON again.
●
Repeatedly blinks - The system may
be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems can occur.
—
Security System
Alarm Indicator
●
Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 134
—
Indicator
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 82 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
83
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
ECON Mode
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●
Comes on when you press the
ECON button.
2 ECON Button P. 424
Smart Entry
System Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●
Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the smart entry system
or push button starting system.
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Auto High-Beam
Indicator (Green)
*
●
Comes on when all the operating
conditions of the auto high-beam
are met.
2 Auto High-Beam (High Beam
Support System)
*
P. 147
—
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 83 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
84
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the RDM system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Comes on when the RDM system
shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
The system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 84 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
85
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
ACC.
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Comes on if anything covers the
radar sensor cover and prevents the
sensor from detecting a vehicle in
front.
●
May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
●
ACC has been automatically
canceled.
●
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator does not go off even after you
clean the sensor cover.
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Indicator (Green)
●
Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429
—
●
Comes on if the temperature inside
the camera is too high.
●
ACC has been automatically
canceled.
●
Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
●
Goes off - The camera has been cooled
down. Pressing the MAIN button can
resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 85 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
86
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the LKAS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Green)
●
Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
P. 447
—
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 86 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
87
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Collision
Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on when you deactivate
the CMBS
TM
. A multi-information
display message appears for five
seconds.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the CMBS
TM
.
●
Stays on constantly without the
CMBS
TM
off - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 467
●
Comes on when the CMBS
TM
system shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
●
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
message does not disappear even after you
clean the sensor cover.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 467
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high. Use the climate control
system to cool down the camera. The
system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 87 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
88
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the (information) button to see the message again
with the system message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
2 Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 555
●
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
u Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-
Information Display P. 490
●
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 551
●
Appears when the engine coolant temperature is
near its upper limit.
●
Drive slowly to prevent overheating.
●
Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely
closed.
●
The beeper sounds and the message comes on if any
door or the trunk is opened while driving.
●
Goes off when all doors and the trunk are closed.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 88 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
89
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if there is a problem with the automatic
lighting control system.
●
Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears if there is a problem with the low beam
headlights.
●
Appears while driving - The low beam headlights
may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive
safely, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
●
Appears if there is a problem with the auto high-
beam.
●
Manually operate the headlight switch.
●
If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
●
Appears when the area around the camera on the
windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.
●
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a
soft cloth.
●
If the message does not disappear after cleaning the
lens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with LED
headlights
Models with
auto high-beam
Models with
auto high-beam
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 89 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
90
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor
system. The beeper sounds.
●
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even
after you clean the area, have the system checked by a
dealer.
●
Appears if there is a problem with the acoustic
vehicle alerting system.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears while you are customizing the settings and
the shift lever is moved out of
(P.
2 Customized Features P. 108
●
Appears if you try to go to Vehicle Settings from
the multi-information display while the audio/
information screen
*
or audio/information touch
screen
*
shows the same menu.
●
Select either display to customize a setting. You cannot
have Vehicle Settings displayed on the multi-
information display and audio/information screen
simultaneously.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
Models with
parking sensor
system
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 90 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
91
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON.
2 Turning on the Power P. 416
●
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the POWER button.
●
Appears if you push the POWER button to turn the
power system off without the shift lever in (P.
●
Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.
●
Push the POWER button twice after moving the shift
lever to
(P.
●
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
●
Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
Press the POWER button twice with your foot off the
brake pedal to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
Canadian models
U.S. models
Canadian models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 91 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
92
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside
the vehicle.
●
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote
back inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 143
●
Appears when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak.
●
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 526
●
Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too
weak to turn on the power system or the key is not
within operating range to turn on the power system.
A beeper sounds six times.
●
Bring the smart entry remote in front of the POWER
button to be touched with.
2 POWER Button P. 141
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 546
●
Appears three seconds after you bring the smart
entry remote in front of the POWER button when
To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button
appears. To Start Vehicle: Brake + Push appears
sequentially.
2 Changing the Power Mode P. 141
●
Appears if there is a problem with the radiator
system.
●
Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 92 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
93
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the 12-volt battery.
●
Appears when the 12-volt battery is not charging.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Checking the 12-Volt Battery P. 525
●
Appears along with the 12-volt battery charging
system indicator - Turn off the climate control system
and rear defogger to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 554
●
Appears when the washer fluid gets low.
●
Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 505
●
Appears for about three seconds when ACC has
been automatically canceled.
●
You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+
button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429
●
Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with
a vehicle in front of you.
●
Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the
brakes, change lanes, etc.).
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
P. 467
Canadian models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 93 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
94
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
●
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,
snow, fog, etc.).
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
appears again after you cleaned the area around the
camera.
●
Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too
high.
●
ACC/LKAS has been automatically canceled.
●
Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.
●
Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing
the MAIN/LKAS button can resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 447
●
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
●
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
●
The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 447
●
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system
also steers the vehicle to help you remain within
your driving lane.
●
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
●
The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 443
●
You can change the setting for the road departure
mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only
can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Warning Only
When you selected Normal or Wide
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 94 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
95
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper
sounds simultaneously.
●
Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
●
Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS
button is pressed, but there is a problem with a
system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels
automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.
●
If any other system indicators come on, such as the
VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2 Indicators P. 74
●
Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door
while the power system is on by smart entry remote.
2 Remote Engine Start P. 418
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 95 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
96
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the power system temperature is
high.
●
Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
harder to start on an incline.
●
Park in a safe place, and cool the system down.
2 Overheating P. 551
●
Appears when the High Voltage battery temperature
is low.
●
Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
harder to start on an incline.
●
Goes off once you start driving as the High Voltage
battery warms up.
●
Appears after the 12-volt battery charging system
indicator comes on.
●
Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
harder to start on an incline.
●
Contact a dealer immediately.
●
Appears when the High Voltage battery temperature
is too low to operate (approx. -22°F [-30°C] or
below).
●
You can start the engine and use the climate control
system to warm up the interior, which will also warm
the High Voltage battery enough for you to drive the
vehicle.
●
Appears when the High Voltage battery and other
system control temperatures are too low to operate
(approx. -40°F [-40°C] or below).
●
You must wait for an increase in the ambient
temperature or move the vehicle to a warmer location.
●
Consult a dealer.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 96 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
97
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if the power system is in diagnostic mode.
●
You may notice a decrease in available power. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
As a result of diagnostics, the POWER SYSTEM
indicator may come on.
2 POWER SYSTEM Indicator P. 75
●
Appears when you failed to select EV mode or EV
mode is automatically canceled.
●
The cause may be shown with the following
message:
- Ambient Temperature Too Low
- Battery Charge Too Low
- Engine Too Cold
- Cabin Being Heated
- Speed Too High
- Hard Acceleration Requested
●
EV mode is available once the condition is improved or
the cause that canceled EV mode is cleared.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 97 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
98
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, POWER/CHARGE gauge, High
Voltage battery charge level gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when
the power mode is in ON.
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
■
Speedometer
■
Fuel Gauge
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 98 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
99
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuGauges
Instrument Panel
■ Electric motor
The degree to which the electric motor is being powered is displayed by the readings
on the POWER side.
■ Battery charge in progress
The degree to which the High Voltage battery is being charged is displayed by the
readings on the CHARGE side.
Shows the remaining High Voltage battery charge level.
■
POWER/CHARGE Gauge
■
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
1High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
The High Voltage battery charge level may decrease
under the following conditions:
•
When the 12-volt battery has been replaced.
•
When the 12-volt battery has been disconnected.
•
When the High Voltage battery control system
corrects its reading.
The charge level reading will be corrected
automatically while driving.
Changes in the temperature of the High Voltage
battery can increase or decrease the battery’s
charging capacity. If temperature changes cause the
battery’s capacity to change, the number of
indicators in the battery charge level gauge may also
change, even if the amount of charging remains the
same.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 99 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
100
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature
indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
■ Main displays
Press the (information) button to change the display.
■
Switching the Display
Average Fuel Economy/
Instant Fuel Economy
Range
Elapsed Time
Average Speed
Blank Screen
Vehicle
Settings
Engine Oil
Life
Button
Average Fuel
Economy Records
Eco Drive Display
Power Flow
Monitor
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 100 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
101
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
■ Lower displays
Press the SEL/RESET button to change the display.
Odometer Trip A Trip B
SEL/RESET
Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 101 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
102
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip
meter is reset to 0.0.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining power and fuel. This
distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■
Odometer
■
Trip Meter
■
Average Fuel Economy
■
Range
■
Elapsed Time
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the SEL/RESET button.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
1Range
The displayed range may change even when the
vehicle is stationary.
1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 102 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
103
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was
reset.
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 489
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system
*
.
■
Average Speed
■
Instant Fuel Economy
■
Engine Oil Life
■
Outside Temperature
■
Turn-by-Turn Directions
*
1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display's customized
features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
1Turn-by-Turn Directions
*
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 103 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
104
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Shows the average fuel economy for the last
three driving cycles (1-3), and the current
driving cycle (0) in mpg or l/100 km.
Each time you set the power mode to ON, the
display is updated, and the oldest record is
deleted.
■
Average Fuel Economy Records
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 104 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
105
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
■ Eco Drive Display
The vehicle icon on the display moves forward or backward while driving.
The more aggressive the acceleration is, the further the icon moves forward.
The more aggressive the deceleration is, the further the icon moves backward.
Keep the icon near the center of the circle for better fuel economy while driving.
The fuel economy display color changes while driving. The area around the vehicle
icon becomes blue with aggressive acceleration and deceleration, and blue green as
fuel economy gets better, then green when driving in the most fuel efficient style.
Keep the color green as long as possible.
■
Eco Drive Display/Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
1Eco Drive Display
The ambient meter color changes corresponding to
the eco drive display.
Aggressive
Deceleration
Vehicle Icon
Aggressive
Acceleration
Blue Green Blue
Moderate
Deceleration
Slow
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Moderate
Acceleration
Blue green Blue green
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 105 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
106
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
■ Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
Appear for a few seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Each has three stages. Depending on your driving style, the leaf icon(s) and the
gauge increase or decrease to indicate that you have reached a different stage of
fuel economy.
■ Resetting the Drive Cycle Score
1. Make sure the shift lever is in
(P. Turn the power mode to ON.
2. If ECON mode is on, press the ECON button to turn it off.
3. Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
4. Turn the power mode to ON again.
u Make sure to complete steps from 4 through 6 within 30 seconds.
5. Depress the brake pedal twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will change from blue to green.
u When the Fuel Efficiency Backlight setting on the multi-information display
is off, the color stays blue.
6. Press the ECON button twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will turn to monochrome.
7. Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Drive Cycle
Score
Lifetime
Points
Advancing to
2nd Stage
Receding to
2nd Stage
Advancing to
3rd Stage
Receding to
3rd Stage
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 106 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
107
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Displays the power flow of the motor and engine, indicating the vehicle's power
source and whether the battery is being charged.
■
Power Flow Monitor
1Power Flow Monitor
While the vehicle is stationary with the engine
running, the following may appear on the multi-
information display.
Power is supplied by
the motor and the
engine.
The motor is charging
the High Voltage
battery.
The engine is running
and the motor is
charging the High
Voltage battery.
Regeneration
Power is being
supplied by only
the engine.
Hybrid (HV)
Engine ON
Engine OFF
Power is supplied by
the motor.
Electric Vehicle (EV)
The engine is running
and the motor is charging
the High Voltage battery.
Engine (Direct Drive)
Power Flow
Engine
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 107 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
108
Instrument Panel
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the button while the power
mode is in ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
■
Customized Features
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the
button.
2 List of customizable options P. 111
2 Example of customization settings P. 114
Customization is possible when you see the driver’s
ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) on the screen.
The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter
you have used to unlock the driver’s door. The
customized settings are recalled every time you
unlock the driver’s door with that remote.
When you customize settings: Shift to
(P
Customizing is also available from the audio/
information screen
*
or audio/information touch
screen
*
.
You cannot have Vehicle Settings displayed on the
multi-information display while the audio/
information screen
*
or audio/information touch
screen
*
shows the same menu.
2 Customized Features P. 295, 314
Models with driving position memory system
All models
Button:
Changes the customize
menus and items.
Multi-Information Display:
Goes to Vehicle Settings.
SEL/RESET button:
Enters the selected item.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 108 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
109
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
■ Customization flow
Press the button.
SEL/RESET
Vehicle Settings
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Memory Position Link
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
4
4
4
4
TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup
Meter Setup
Driving Position Setup
*
Keyless Access Setup
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
“Trip B” Reset Timing
4
Head-up Warning
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
4
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
SEL/RESET
Remote Start System ON/OFF
Forward Collision Warning Distance
4
4
4
ACC Display Speed Unit
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Keyless Access Beep
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 109 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
110
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Exit
4
4
4
Door Setup
Maintenance Reset
Default All
SEL/RESET
4
SEL/RESET
4
Lighting Setup
SEL/RESET
4
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
4
4
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 110 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
111
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
TPMS
Calibration
— Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate
Driver Assist
System
Setup
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes at which distance the CMBS
TM
alerts. Long/Normal
*1
/Short
Head-up Warning Turns the head-up warning lights on to flash or off. On
*1
/Off
ACC Pre-Running Car
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects
a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC
range.
On/Off
*1
ACC Display Speed Unit Changes the ACC display speed unit.
mph
*1
/km/h (U.S.)
mph/km/h
*1
(Canada)
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/Warning
Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
On/Off
*1
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 111 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
112
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Meter Setup
Language Selection Changes the displayed language. English
*1
/French/Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F (U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C (Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and
elapsed time A.
When Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and
elapsed time B.
When Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Driving
Position Setup
*
Memory Position Link
Changes the driver's seat position to a stored
setting.
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/All Doors
Keyless Access Light
Flash
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
either front door handle.
On
*1
/Off
Remote Start System
ON/OFF
Turn the remote engine start feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 112 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
113
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight Auto Off
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver's door.
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed
*1
/Shift
From P/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When Driver’s
Door Opens
*1
/All Doors
When Shifted To Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door
*1
/ All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On
*1
/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec
*1
Maintenance
Reset
—
Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you
have performed the maintenance service.
Cancel/Reset
Default All — Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default. Cancel/Set
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 113 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
114
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
■ Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are
shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
1. Press the button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
2. Press the button until Meter
Setup appears on the display.
3. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u Language Selection appears first in the
display.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 114 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
115
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
4. Press the button until “Trip A”
Reset Timing appears on the display, then
press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select When Refueled, IGN Off,
Manually Reset, or Exit.
5. Press the button and select When
Refueled, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
u The When Refueled Setup screen
appears, then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
6. Press the button until Exit appears
on the display, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 115 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
116
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 116 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
117
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 118
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 120
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength........................................ 121
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 122
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 126
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 128
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 129
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 130
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 134
Security System Alarm...................... 134
Opening and Closing the Windows .... 137
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
.. 140
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
POWER Button................................. 141
Turn Signals..................................... 144
Light Switches.................................. 144
Fog Lights........................................ 146
Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support
System)
*
........................................ 147
Daytime Running Lights ................... 150
Wipers and Washers ........................ 151
Brightness Control ........................... 153
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button .......................................... 154
Driving Position Memory System
*
.... 155
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 157
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 158
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 159
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 160
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 167
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 179
Synchronized Mode ......................... 181
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 182
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 117 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
118
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the power mode is in ON.
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
then Clock Adjustment.
3. Rotate to change hour, then press .
4. Rotate to change minute, then press .
■ Using the SETTINGS button
1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)
button until the clock display blinks.
2. Press Preset
(4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to
adjust the time.
3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the
time.
■
Adjusting the Time
1Adjusting the Clock
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 295
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 295
Models with one display
Models with one display
1Using the SETTINGS button
To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold
the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then
press the
(6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
Models with one display
CLOCK (SETTINGS)
Button
(6 (Reset) Button
(4 (Hour) Button
(5 (Minute) Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 118 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
119
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen
1. Select , then select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info, then Clock
Adjustment.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
/.
4. Select OK to set the time.
Models with two displays
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen
The clock is automatically updated through the audio
system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
Models with two displays
3
4
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 119 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
120
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following key:
Use the smart entry remote to turn on and off
the power system, to lock and unlock the
doors and to open the trunk. You can also use
the smart entry system to lock and unlock the
doors and to open the trunk.
■ Smart entry remote
The built-in key can be used to lock or unlock
the doors when the smart entry remote
battery becomes weak and the power door
lock/unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built-
in key, push the built-in key into the smart
entry remote until it clicks.
■
Keys
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 134
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
•
Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
•
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
•
Keep the keys away from liquids.
•
Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the power
system may not activate, and the remote transmitter
may not work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely turn the power system on using the
smart entry remote.
2 Remote Engine Start P. 418
Built-in Key
Release Knob
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 120 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
121
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
Controls
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to activate the power system.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or activating
the power system may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
■
Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot activate the
power system, contact a dealer.
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 121 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
122
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.
■ Locking the doors and the trunk
Press the door lock button on the front door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors lock; and the
security system sets.
■
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
Door Lock Button
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
•
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
•
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else
with the remote is within range.
•
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
•
If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
•
After locking the door, wait at least two seconds
before unlocking it by gripping the handle.
•
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
•
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not
be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry
remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
•
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 526
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 122 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
123
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■ Unlocking the doors and the trunk
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button P. 131
Trunk Release Button
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 123 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
124
Controls
■ Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
u The remaining doors unlock.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 167
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 526
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
LED
Unlock Button
Lock
Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 124 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
125
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
Fully insert the key and turn it.
■ Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward
a
or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b
, and close the door.
■ Locking the passenger's doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
■
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, all the
other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
doors.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
Lock
Unlock
■
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand when you
lock the driver’s door, or any of the other doors,
otherwise you may end up locking the key inside the
vehicle.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 125 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
126
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■ Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■
Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all the other doors lock at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 126 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
127
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using
the multi-information display, audio/information touch screen
*
or audio/
information screen
*
.
■
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The inner front door handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 128
Inner Handle
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 127 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
128
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all the doors.
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■ When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the
master lock switch, all the other doors lock/unlock at
the same time.
To Unlock
Master Door
Lock Switch
To Lock
■
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Unlock
Lock
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 128 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
129
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.
■ Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■ Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■
Auto Door Locking
■
Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information
display, audio/information screen
*
or audio/
information touch screen
*
.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 129 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
130
Controls
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 70
Using the Trunk Opener
Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.
Trunk
Release
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 130 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
131
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button
Controls
■ Locking the trunk opener
You can lock the trunk release with the built-
in key.
Using the Trunk Release Button
Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the smart entry remote.
u The beeper will sound.
1Using the Trunk Release Button
•
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
•
A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
•
Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
•
Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk
lid when closing it.
•
Do not place the smart entry remote around the
rear seat when closing the trunk.
Trunk Release Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 131 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
132
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter
Controls
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
Trunk Main Switch
The trunk main switch disables the trunk
release button on the remote transmitter and
the trunk release button on the trunk lid to
protect luggage in the trunk.
1. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
2. Lock the glove box.
3. Lock the trunk release.
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 130
Trunk Button
1Trunk Main Switch
If you need to give the key to someone else, remove
the built-in key from the smart entry remote by
sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a
valet key.
ON
OFF
Main Switch
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 132 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
133
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
Controls
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Lever
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 133 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
134
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the motor. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when selecting the ACCESSORY mode with the
POWER button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the POWER button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the smart entry
remote.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the shift lever
is moved out of
(P or the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter, or smart entry system. The system,
along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 134 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
135
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• All doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart
entry system.
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter, or smart entry system. The security system indicator goes off at the
same time.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
•
Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
•
Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
•
Opening the hood with the hood release.
•
Moving the shift lever out of (P.
If the 12-volt battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may activate
once the 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 135 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
136
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON.
■
Panic Mode
Panic Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 136 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
137
Continued
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,
using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to open and
close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver's seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver's
window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
On
Off
Power Window
Lock Button
Indicator
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 137 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
138
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
To open: Press the unlock button, and then
within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.
If the windows and moonroof stop midway,
repeat the procedure.
■
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
Open
■
Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote
Unlock
Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 138 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
139
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.
■
Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key
Close
Open
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 139 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
140
Controls
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
■
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close
Tilt
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 140 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
141
Continued
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
POWER Button
*1: Canadian models
■
Changing the Power Mode
1POWER Button
POWER Button Operating Range
You can start the power system when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The power system may also start if the smart entry
remote is close to the door or window, even if it is
outside the vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
Button message appears on the multi-information
display.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 546
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
Operating Range
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked
*1
. The power to all
electrical components is turned off.
Press the button without the shift lever in
(P.
Shift to
(P then press the button.
Press the button.
Without pressing
the brake pedal
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks (from ON to
ACCESSORY). Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can be used.
Indicator
Shift to (P.
U.S. models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 141 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button
142
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P and the power
mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the 12-volt battery drain.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the POWER button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
■
Automatic Power Off
■
Power Mode Reminder
1Changing the Power Mode
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the POWER button while
moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering
wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.
Canadian models
Canadian models
All models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 142 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
143
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button
Controls
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/
or outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place within the system’s
operational range.
■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the multi-information display notifies the
driver inside that the remote is out.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.
■
Smart Entry Remote Reminder
1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the power system has been turned on, you can
no longer change the POWER button mode or
restart the power system. Always make sure if the
remote is in your vehicle when you operate the
POWER button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to activate. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also activate even if the remote
is within the system’s operational range.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 143 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
144
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode
setting.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
Right Turn
Left Turn
■
Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 81
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the power system is
off because it will cause the 12-volt battery to
discharge.
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 144 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
145
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
■
Automatic Lighting Control
1Automatic Lighting Control
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Light Sensor
Light Sensor
Models without automatic
intermittent wipers
Models with automatic
intermittent wipers
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 145 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights
146
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with
you, and close the driver’s door.
u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but
do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the
switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Fog Lights
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
■
Headlight Integration with Wipers
*
■
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
1Automatic Lighting Control
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
Bright
Dark
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
*
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
1Fog Lights
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator P. 81
Fog Light Switch
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 146 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
147
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
Continued
Controls
Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
Uses the camera attached to the windshield, monitors the space ahead of your
vehicle, and automatically changes the low beam headlights to high beam
headlights when necessary.
1Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
The auto high-beam determines when to change the
headlight beams by responding to the brightness of
the lights ahead of your vehicle. In the following
cases, however, the system may not respond to the
lights properly:
•
The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
•
Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
•
Other light sources, such as streetlights and electric
billboards are illuminating the road ahead.
•
The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
•
The road is bumpy or has many curves.
•
A vehicle ahead of you suddenly cuts you off or is
not traveling in the appropriate direction.
•
Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient
for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
■
The headlight switch is in
AUTO.
■
The lever is in the low beam
position.
■
The system recognizes that you
are driving at night and the
low beam headlights come on.
■
The vehicle speed is above 25
mph (40 km/h).
The system operates when:
The camera is not detecting any lights coming from preceding or oncoming
vehicles: The headlights change to high beams.
15-degree
The camera detects lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle: The
headlights are returned to low beams.
The camera monitors the range within the 30-degree view angle. The distance that
the camera can detect lights ahead differs depending on conditions, such as the
brightness of the lights and the weather.
The system changes between high and low beam headlights when:
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 147 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
148
Controls
Turn the headlight switch in AUTO and pull
the headlight lever to low beam.
2 Light Switches P. 144
The auto high-beam indicator (Green) comes
on.
■ Temporary cancellation
The auto high-beam operation is temporarily canceled while:
• You are continuously driving at a speed below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• The windshield wipers run at high speed for more than a few seconds.
The system operation resumes once the condition that caused it to cancel improves.
■
To Operate the System
1To Operate the System
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
•
Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
•
Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
•
Do not attach an object, sticker or film in the area
around the camera.
•
Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun.
If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to
cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.
If the Can Not Operate: message appears:
Park your vehicle in a safe place. Wipe away debris
blocking the windshield, then start driving again. If
the message remains on even after driving for a while
with the clean windshield, have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Headlight
Switch
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 148 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
149
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
Controls
Disable the system when the vehicle is parked
with the power mode in ON and the light
switch is in the AUTO position.
To disable the system: Pull the light switch
lever towards you and hold it for 40 seconds.
The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will
blink twice.
To enable the system: Pull the light switch
lever towards you and hold it for 30 seconds.
The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will
blink once.
■
To Disable the System
1To Disable the System
The auto high-beam will remain in the selected
disabled or enabled setting each time you turn the
power system on.
AUTO Position
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 149 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
150
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is ON.
• The headlight switch is off, or in .
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 150 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
151
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Continued
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the power mode is in ON.
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT
*
, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■ AUTO
*
2 Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
P. 152
■ Adjusting wiper operation
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
operation.
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
then stop.
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest
delay setting ( ) and the
LO
setting become the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a
few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
All models
Adjustment Ring
MIST
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to
use
washer.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 151 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
152
Controls
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.
■ AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When in AUTO, you can also adjust the
rainfall sensor sensitivity using the adjustment
ring.
Sensor sensitivity
■
Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then
remove the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not put the wiper lever in AUTO when cleaning
the windshield or driving through a car wash. If the
wiper lever is in AUTO, and the power mode is in ON,
the rainfall sensor may respond to your hand or car
wash liquids, and the wipers may operate
automatically.
Rainfall Sensor
Adjustment Ring
Low Sensitivity:
Wipers will operate when more
rainfall is detected.
High Sensitivity:
Wipers will operate when less rainfall
is detected.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 152 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
153
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
power mode is in ON, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several
seconds after you have adjusted the
brightness, you will be returned to the
previous screen.
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the multi-
information display while you are adjusting it.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob switches the
display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
Control Knob
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 153 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
154
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged. Also, do not
use the system for a long time while the power
system is off. This may weaken the 12-volt battery,
making it difficult to turn the power system on.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 154 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
155
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
*
Continued
Controls
Driving Position Memory System
*
You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat adjusts
automatically to one of the two preset positions.
When you enter the vehicle, the multi-information display briefly shows you which
remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
1Driving Position Memory System
*
Using the multi-information display, audio/
information screen
*
or audio/information touch
screen
*
, you can disable the automatic seat
adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
System Operation
The system will not operate if:
•
The vehicle speed is above 2 mph (3 km/h).
•
Either memory position button is pressed while the
seat is in motion.
•
The seat position is adjusted while in operation.
•
The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.
DRIVER 1
DRIVER 2
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 155 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
*
156
Controls
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
u You will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
3. Press and hold memory button
(1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
u Once the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.
1. Move the shift lever to
(P.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button (
(1 or (2).
u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear a beep, and the
indicator light stays on.
■
Storing a Position in Memory
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
•
You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
•
You readjust the seat position before the double-
beep.
•
You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2
SET Button
■
Recalling the Stored Position
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
•
Press the SET button or memory button (1 or ( 2.
•
Adjust the seat position.
•
Shift into a position other than (P.
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 156 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
157
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To adjust
To lock
Lever
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 157 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
158
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
When you are driving after dark, the
automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces
the glare from headlights behind you, based
in inputs from the mirror sensor. This feature
is always active.
■
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
*
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 160
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night Position
Up
Down
■
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in
(R.
Sensor
Down
Up
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 158 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
159
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
■
Expanded View Driver's Mirror
1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
Inner Segment
Outer Segment
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 159 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
160
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■ Adjusting the front power seat(s)
*
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Lumbar Support
Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 160 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
161
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
■ Adjusting the front passenger’s manual seat
*
1Adjusting the front passenger’s manual seat
*
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to
move the seat, then
release the bar.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 161 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
162
Controls
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 162 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
163
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Continued
Controls
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
■
Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions
1Head Restraints
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
•
Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
•
Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
•
Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 163 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
164
Controls
A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■
Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
■
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 164 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
165
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the power
system is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 165 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
166
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.
■
Using the Rear Seat Armrest
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 166 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
167
Continued
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver's door.
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■
Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
•
When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
•
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
•
When you lock the driver's door.
•
When you set the power mode to ON.
•
When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) mode, the interior lights go off after about 15
minutes.
Door Activated Position
Off
Door Activated
Position
On
Off
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 167 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
168
Controls
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
■
Map Lights
1Map Lights
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 168 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
169
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
You can lock the glove box with the built-in
key.
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.
■
Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove Box
Handle
To Lock
■
Console Compartment
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 169 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
170
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Pull the handle to open the pocket.
■
Center Pocket
Handle
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 170 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
171
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
■ Front door beverage holders
■ Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
■
Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 171 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
172
Controls
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY
or ON.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.
■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
■
Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element: The power socket can overheat.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, use the power socket only
when the power system is on.
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 172 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
173
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:
1. To turn the system on and off, press and
hold the (power) button.
u When the system is activated, the green
indicator light comes on.
2. Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area.
u The system will automatically start
charging the device, and the amber
indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible
with the system, and placed with the
chargeable side in the center of the
charging area.
3. When charging is completed, the green
indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber
indicator light will stay on.
■
Wireless Charger
*
1Wireless Charger
*
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the
system for a long time when the power system is off.
This may weaken the 12-volt battery, making it
difficult to turn the power system on.
When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that
came with the compatible device you want to charge.
3
CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad
and the device to be charged will get
hot and can burn you.
• Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the
device.
• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and
other debris before charging.
• Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks,
etc.) on the charger and the device.
• Do not use oil, grease, alcohol,
benzine or thinner for cleaning the
charge pad.
• Do not cover the system with towels,
clothing, or other objects while
charging etc.
• Avoid spraying aerosols which may
come in contact with the change pad
surface.
Green Indicator
Amber Indicator
Charging Area
(Power)
Button
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 173 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
174
Controls
■ When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator Cause Solution
Green
&
Amber
Blinking
simulta-
neously
There is an obstacle(s) between
the charging area and the
device.
Remove the
obstacle(s).
The device is not within the
charging area.
Move the device to the
center of the charging
area where is
located.
Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty.
Contact a dealer for
repairs.
1Wireless Charger
*
NOTICE
Do not place any magnetic recording media or
precision machines within the charging area while
charging.
The data on your cards such as credit cards can be
lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision
machines such as watches can go wrong.
“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks
owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
•
The device is already fully charged.
•
The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging.
•
You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic wave or noises such as TV station,
electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its
chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the
charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
During the charging phase, it is normal for the
charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
•
All the doors or the trunk are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning
of the smart entry system.
•
The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a
charging area.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 174 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
175
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.
The cargo hook in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.
■
Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
■
Cargo Hook
1Cargo Hook
Heavy objects may damage the hook.
Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than
6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 175 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
176
Controls
In addition to the larger cargo area, the trunk
incorporates a small shelf above the High
Voltage (HV) battery module that can carry up
to 15.4 lbs (7kg). Do not exceed this capacity.
Be aware that this vehicle was not designed to
carry a spare tire. This is because the spare
could be forced into the HV battery and cause
leakage of flammable electrolyte in the event
your vehicle were to be severely impacted
from the rear.
In the event a flat tire, a tire repair kit is
provided beneath the trunk floor.
2 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire P. 536
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
■
Cargo Area
1Cargo Area
NOTICE
Heavy objects may damage the trunk shelf.
Make sure any items put on the shelf weigh less than
15.4 lbs (7kg).
3
WARNING
Carrying a spare tire in the trunk can result
in damage to the High Voltage battery and
leakage of flammable electrolyte if your
vehicle were to get severely impacted from
the rear.
Do not carry a spare tire in the trunk.
Trunk
Shelf
■
Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
Push
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 176 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
177
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
■
Front Seat Heaters
*
1Front Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-
volt battery may be weakened, making the power
system difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 177 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
178
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on.
■
Rear Seat Heaters
*
1Rear Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-
volt battery may be weakened, making the power
system difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 178 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
179
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the power system is in ON.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
buttons.
3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel.
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
Floor and
defroster
vents
Floor ventsDashboard and floor
vents, and back of
the center console
Dashboard vents
and back of the
center console
AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons
(Recirculation) Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 179 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
180
Controls
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 180 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
181
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode
Controls
Synchronized Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control buttons.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system.
Models with navigation system
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 181 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
182
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 182 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
183
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 184
USB Port(s
*
) ..................................... 185
Auxiliary Input Jack
*
........................ 186
Audio System Theft Protection
*
....... 187
Audio Remote Controls.................... 188
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 190
Audio/Information Screen ................ 191
Display Setup ................................... 196
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 197
Playing a CD .................................... 199
Playing an iPod ................................ 202
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 205
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 208
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 211
Models with one display
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 213
Audio/Information Screen ................ 214
Audio/Information Touch Screen...... 216
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 230
Display Setup ................................... 231
Voice Control Operation .................. 233
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 237
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
................. 241
Playing a CD .................................... 249
Playing an iPod ................................ 252
Song By Voice
TM
(SBV)...................... 255
Playing Pandora®
*
............................ 259
Playing Aha
TM
................................... 261
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 262
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 265
Models with two displays
HondaLink® ..................................... 267
Wi-Fi Connection............................. 272
Apple CarPlay® ................................ 274
Android Auto
TM
............................... 278
Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 282
Audio Error Messages ...................... 283
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 288
Customized Features................ 295, 314
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
... 338
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 340, 371
Compass
*
.......................................... 406
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 183 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
184
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service
*
. It can also
play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and
Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel or
the icons on the touchscreen interface
*
.
1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 288
SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM® is a trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Remote Controls
iPod
USB
Flash
Drive
Models with one display
Remote Controls
iPod
USB
Flash
Drive
Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 184 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
185
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s
*
)
Features
USB Port(s
*
)
1. Open the cover.
2. Install the iPod USB connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.
u The USB port (1.0 A) is for playing audio
files on a USB flash drive and connecting
a cellular phone and charging device.
u The USB port (1.5 A) is for charging
devices, playing audio files and
connecting compatible phones with
Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto
TM
.
■ In the console compartment
*
The USB port (1.0 A) is for playing audio files
on the USB flash drive and connecting a
cellular phone and charging device.
1USB Port(s
*
)
•
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•
We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
•
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
•
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
•
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
•
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
The USB port can supply up to 1.0 A/1.5 A of power.
It does not output 1.0 A/1.5 A unless requested by
the device. For amperage details, read the operating
manual of the device that needs to be charged.
Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON first.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the
port may generate noise in the radio you are listening
to.
USB charge
In Center Pocket
Models with one display
Models with two displays
In Console Compartment
*
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 185 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
186
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack
*
Features
Auxiliary Input Jack
*
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
*
You can return to AUX mode by pressing the AUX
button.
Replacement of the audio system with other than a
genuine Honda system may make the auxiliary jack
inoperable.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 186 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
187
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
*
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
*
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 187 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
188
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FMAMCDUSBiPod
Bluetooth® AudioPandora®
*
AUX
FMAMSiriusXM®
*
CDUSBiPod
Pandora®
*
Bluetooth® AudioAudio Apps
(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press
(+: To increase the volume.
Press (-: To decrease the volume.
Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora®
*
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be operated.
Button
SOURCE Button
Button
(+ Button
(- Button
MENU
Button
*
Models with one display
Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 188 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
189
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Steering Wheel MENU Button
To choose options for the current audio device, press MENU, Audio Menu, and
then SOURCE.
Options available to you for each audio device:
• Radio: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Save Preset, Seek Up, or Seek
Down.
• HD Radio
TM*
: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Save Preset, Seek Up, or Seek
Down.
• SiriusXM®
*
: You can select Scan, Save Preset, Channel Up, Channel Down,
Category Up, or Category Down.
• CD or USB flash drive: You can select Scan Folders, Scan Tracks, Repeat
Folder, Repeat Track, Random in Folder, or Random All Tracks.
• iPod: You can select Play/Pause, Repeat Song, Shuffle Albums, or Shuffle All
Songs.
• Bluetooth® Audio: You can select Pause or Play.
• Pandora®
*
: You can select Like, Dislike, Bookmark, or Play/Pause.
To choose options for the navigation system while it is in operation, press MENU,
select Navigation Menu, and then SOURCE.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
To choose options for HFL, press MENU, select Phone Menu, and then SOURCE.
You can select Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial.
To choose options for the display setting, press MENU, select Display Setting, and
then SOURCE.
You can select Brightness, Contrast, or Black Level.
1Audio Remote Controls
The MENU button is available only when the audio
mode is FM, AM, SiriusXM®
*
, CD, USB, iPod,
Pandora®
*
, or Bluetooth® Audio.
Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 189 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
190
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU button: Press to select any mode.
The available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press once and make an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
Models with one display
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 198
2 Radio text P. 198
2 Music Search P. 200, 203, 209
2 Scan P. 198, 201, 210
2 Random/Repeat P. 201, 204, 210
This product includes software codes licensed under
the conditions stated by the copyright holder.
For license conditions and the copy of the
corresponding source code, visit: http://
www.hondaopensource1.com/002
Button Selector Knob
MENU ButtonBACK Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 190 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
191
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
■
Switching the Display
(Display) Button
Audio
Trip Computer
(Current Drive)
Clock/Wallpaper
Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)
Audio/Information Screen
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 191 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
192
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 192 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
193
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
4. Rotate to select Add New Wallpaper,
then press .
u The preview of the imported data is
displayed.
5. Rotate to select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
6. Press to save the data.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
•
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
•
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
•
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•
Up to 255 files can be selected.
•
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 193 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
194
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Set, then press .
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely.
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview
and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press to select
OK, or press the BACK button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 194 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
195
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .
Rotate to scroll through the following
choices:
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Selector Knob
SETTINGS Button
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
SVC
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 195 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
196
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.
4. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 196 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
197
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
FM/AM Button
Press to select a band.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press and to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 197 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
198
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .
■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press to select Stop, or press the BACK button.
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 188
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the MENU
screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 198 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
199
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Continued
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC
*1
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press or to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 199 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
200
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a folder.
4. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•
When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•
When you change the audio mode to CD.
•
When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
File Selection
Folder Selection
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 200 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
201
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Random/Repeat
is selected.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 201 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
202
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX
button.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press or to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
Album Art
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 202 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
203
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a menu.
4. Press to display the items on that menu.
5. Rotate to select an item, then press .
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 284
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 203 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
204
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.
Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 204 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
205
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Continued
Features
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.
U.S. models
Compatible phones only
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora
®
, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
®
,
the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media,
Inc. Used with permission. Pandora
®
is only available in
certain countries. Please visit
http://www.pandora.com/legal
for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
Pandora® is free personalized radio that offers
effortless and endless music and comedy. Just start
with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs,
genres, composers, or comedians and it will do the
rest.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.
iPhone
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 205 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
206
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button
Press to select Pandora®.
Skip Button
Press to skip a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to switch to another station.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.
Rating Icon
Preset Button (1)
Press to switch the mode between
pause and resume.
Preset Button (2)
Press to select Dislike.
Preset Button (3)
Press to select Like.
Preset Button (4)
Press to select Bookmark Track.
Preset Button (5)
Press to select Bookmark Artist.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 206 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
207
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Like (Thumbs-up)
• Dislike (Thumbs-down)
• Station List
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track
• Bookmark Artist
• Play/Pause
■ Operating a menu item
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select an item, then press .
■
Pandora® Menu
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 285
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 207 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
208
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press or to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 208 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
209
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a folder.
4. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 288
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 284
File Selection
Folder Selection
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 209 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
210
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Random/Repeat
is selected.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 210 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
211
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 347
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
•
U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.
AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
Skip Buttons
Press or
to change files.
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
VOL/
(Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Audio/
Information
Screen
Preset Button (1)
Press to resume
playing a file.
Preset Button (2)
Press to pause a
playing file.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 211 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
212
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 212 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
213
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
: Select to go to the home screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 216
: Select to display any mode.
The available modes include Sound, View
Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes.
: Select to go back to the previous display
when it is displayed.
(Day/Night) Button: Press to change the
audio/information touch screen brightness.
Press once and select
(- or (+ to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.
Models with two displays
1Audio System Basic Operation
Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 238, 240
2 Music Search P. 250, 253, 263, 266
2 Scan P. 239, 248, 251, 264
2 Play Mode P. 251, 254, 264
(Day/Night)
Button
(HOME)
Icon
(MENU) Icon (BACK) Icon
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 213 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
214
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status, trip computer, compass
*
, Turn by Turn, and clock/
wallpaper.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
■
Switching the Display
(Display)
Button
Audio
Compass
*
/Trip
Computer/Audio
Clock
Turn by Turn/Trip
Computer/Audio
Audio/Information
Screen
Wallpaper
Trip Computer/
Audio
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 214 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
215
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ Turn by Turn
Displays the Turn by Turn screen.
■ Trip computer
Displays the range and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the
average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Audio
Displays the current audio information.
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Displays a clock screen.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 215 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
216
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.
Select to go to the home screen.
Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation
*
, HondaLink, Aha,
Smartphone connection, or App List.
■ Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 371
■
Switching the Display
Home Screen
Models without
navigation system
Models with
navigation system
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 216 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
217
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Continued
Features
■ Info
Displays Trip Computer. To see all available information, Trip Computer, Voice
Info, or System/Device Information, select on the Info Menu screen.
Trip Computer:
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A.
To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A
tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.
Voice Info: Displays the all commands list.
System/Device Information:
• System Info: Displays the device number and the vehicle identification number
(VIN).
• USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.
■ Audio
Displays the current audio information.
■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 314
■ Navigation
*
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 217 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
218
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ HondaLink
Connects with your smartphone
*1
to play personalized music, information, and
social media streams.
2 HondaLink® P. 267
■ Aha
Displays the Aha
TM
screen.
2 Playing Aha
TM
P. 261
■ Smartphone connection
Displays the Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto
TM
screen.
2 Apple CarPlay® P. 274
2 Android Auto
TM
P. 278
■ App List
Adds or removes App or Widget on the home screen.
2 Home Screen P. 222
*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for U.S. and
www.handsfreelink.ca for Canada for compatible phones and hondalink.com for U.S. and
honda.ca/hondalink for Canada for feature details.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 218 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
219
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Continued
Features
1. Select .
2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
4. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
■
Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 219 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
220
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information touch
screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock/Info.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open
the Wallpaper tab.
5. Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data.
u The display will return to the wallpaper
list.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
•
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
•
The file name must be fewer than 256 characters.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•
The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
•
The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 220 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
221
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
■ To view wallpaper once it is set
Press the (display) button to change the audio/information screen until the
wallpaper is displayed.
2 Switching the Display P. 214
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
6. Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
1Wallpaper Setup
When the clock or wallpaper is selected on the audio/
information screen, you can see a preview at full-size
screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 191
From the pop-up menu, select Preview.
To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or
select .
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All,
then Yes.
Audio/information touch screen
Audio/information screen
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 221 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
222
Features
■ To change to a next screen
Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
■
Home Screen
1Home Screen
The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add
any more pages.
Swipe
Icon
Icon Current page position
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 222 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
223
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ To use apps or widgets
1. Select .
2. Select .
3. Select App List.
u The APPS screen appears.
4. Select the app or widget you want to use.
Preinstall app list:
• Browser: Displays the web browser utilized
by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection.
• Calculator: Displays Calculator.
• Downloads: Displays the data downloaded
from the web browser and so on.
• Install USB: Installs and updates apps
stored in the USB flash drive.
• Search: Displays various retrieval screens.
• Settings: Displays the Android setting
screen.
1To use apps or widgets
Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that
app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen.
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 337
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all
the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 337
In case those apps still do not startup normally even
after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in
the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen
will return to before the browser startup.
You can delete user installed apps by the following
procedure.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Detail Information.
6. Select an App that you want to delete.
7. Select Delete.
Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.
App List
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 223 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
224
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ To add app or widget icons on the home screen
App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select .
2. Select .
3. Select and hold empty space on the home
screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Add App or Add Widget.
u The APPS screen appears.
Select and hold.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 224 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
225
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Continued
Features
5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you
want to add.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
7. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 225 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
226
Features
■ To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To move icons on the home screen
You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio,
Settings, Navigation
*
, HondaLink, Aha,
Smartphone connection, and App List icons in the
same manner.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 226 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
227
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ To remove icons from the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the trash icon.
u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To remove icons from the home screen
You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio,
Settings, Navigation
*
, HondaLink, Aha,
Smartphone connection, and App List icons.
Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the
icon on the home screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop to
trash icon.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 227 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
228
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
1. Swipe the upper area of the screen.
u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Select or swipe up the icon to close
the area.
■
Status Area
Swipe
Status Area Icon
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 228 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
229
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system.
1. Select and hold .
2. Select an app you want to close.
3. Select Stop.
u The display will return to the app list.
■
Closing Apps
1Closing Apps
If you leave the apps used open in the background,
some apps may stop operating properly next time
using them.
If this happens close unused apps.
To close all apps on the system, select Stop All, then
Yes.
You cannot close the HondaLink®, Aha
TM
and
Garmin
*
apps.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 229 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
230
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Select .
2. Select Audio.
3. Select .
4. Select Sound.
Select a tab from the following choices:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
Subwoofer, Speed Volume Compensation
(SVC).
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound with the following
procedure.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Sound.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 230 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
231
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Continued
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information touch
screen.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Display Settings.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Background Color.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 231 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
232
Features
Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the
audio source.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
■
Selecting an Audio Source
1Selecting an Audio Source
If you startup preinstalled audio apps, is
displayed on the upper portion of the screen.
These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the
source select screen.
You can startup those audio apps from .
When you are using the Aha
TM
screen and you want
to select another source, select SOURCE on the
upper left of the screen. The source select screen will
appear. Select the source you want.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Select the source icon.
Source Select Screen
Source List Icons
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 232 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
233
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.
The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
• Close the windows and moonroof
*
.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
■
Voice Recognition
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 233 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
234
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
When the (Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep or select Voice Help.
You can also see the list of commands by
selecting Info, , and Voice Info.
*1: Models with navigation system
■
Voice Portal Screen
■ Phone Call
This can be only used when the phone is
connected. When the system recognizes the
Phone call command, the screen will
change to the voice recognition screen for
the phone commands.
• Dial by number
• Call history
• Redial
• Call <Your Contact Name>
• Call <Phone Number>
Phone Call commands are not available if
Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto
TM
is in use.
■ Music Search
*1
This can be only used when the iPod or USB
device is connected.
■ Audio
*1
When the system recognizes the Audio
command, the screen will change to the
audio voice recognition screen.
• Audio On
• Audio Off
• Radio FM
• Radio AM
• Radio SXM
• DISC
• Pandora
*
• iPod
• USB
• Other Sources
Pandora®
*
cannot be used with Android
Auto
TM
.
■ Navigation
*1
The screen changes to the navigation voice
recognition screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■ Voice Settings
The screen changes to the Voice Recog tab
on the System settings screen.
■ Trip Computer
The screen changes to the trip computer
screen.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 234 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
235
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
■ Voice Help
You can see a list of the available
commands on the screen.
• Useful Commands
• Phone Commands
• Audio Commands
• On Screen Commands
• Music Search Commands
• General Commands
• Climate Control Commands
• All Commands
• Voice Settings
• Getting Started
The system accepts these commands on the
voice portal top screen.
• Call <Phone Number>
• Call <Your Contact Name>
• What time is it?
• What is today’s date?
*1: Models with navigation system
■
Useful Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the phone.
• Call by Number
• Call by Name
• Call <Phone Number>
• Call <Your Contact Name>
The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the audio.
■ Radio FM Commands
• Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
• Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM
• Radio FM preset <1-12>
■ Radio AM Commands
• Radio tune to <530-1710> AM
• Radio AM preset <1-6>
■ Radio SXM Commands
• SXM channel <1-999>
• SXM channel <station name>
■
Phone Commands
■
Audio Commands
*1
• Radio SXM preset <1-12>
■ DISC Commands
• DISC play
• DISC play track <1-30>
■ Pandora Commands
*
• Pandora play
■ iPod Commands
• iPod play
• iPod play track <1-30>
• Music Search
• What album is this?
• What am I listening to?
■ USB Commands
• USB play
• USB play track <1-30>
• Music Search
• What album is this?
• What am I listening to?
■ Bluetooth® audio Commands
• Bluetooth® audio play
NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 235 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
236
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
When On Screen Commands is selected,
the explanation screen is displayed.
The system accepts these commands on the
Music Search screen.
■ Using Song By Voice
Song By Voice
TM
is a feature that allows you
to select music from your iPod or USB device
using Voice Commands. To activate this
mode, you must push the talk button and
say: “Music search”.
■ Song By Voice Commands
• What am I listening to?
• Who am I listening to?
• Who is this?
• What’s playing?
• Who’s playing?
• What album is this?
*1: Models with navigation system
■
On Screen Commands
■
Music Search Commands
*1
■ Play Commands
• Play artist <Name>
• Play track/song <Name>
• Play album <Name>
• Play genre/category <Name>
• Play playlist <Name>
• Play composer <Name>
■ List Commands
• List artist <Name>
• List album <Name>
• List genre/category <Name>
• List playlist <Name>
• List composer <Name>
• What time is it?
• What is today’s date?
■
General Commands
• Climate Control on
• Climate Control off
• Fan Speed <1-7>
• Temperature max heat
• Temperature max cool
• Temperature <57-87> degrees
• Defrost on
• Defrost off
• Air conditioner on
• Air conditioner off
• More
• Climate control automatic
• Vent
• Dash and floor
• Fan speed up
• Fan speed down
• Floor vents
• Floor and defrost
• Temperature up
• Temperature down
■
Climate Control Commands
*1
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 236 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
237
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Icons
Select or to search up
and down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Tune Icons
Select or to tune the radio
frequency.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Scan Icon
Select to scan each station with a strong
signal.
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that
station. Select to display preset 7 onwards.
Audio/Information Screen
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 237 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
238
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.
■
Preset Memory
■
Station List
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 188
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
preset memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio
TM
and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
Models with HD Radio
TM
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 238 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
239
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Cancel or .
Displays the subchannel list when an HD Radio
TM
station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select .
2. Select HD Radio Subchannel.
3. Select the channel number.
■
Scan
■
HD Subchannel
Models with HD Radio
TM
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 239 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
240
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.
■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select .
2. Select View Radio Text.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, select Cancel or .
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 240 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
241
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Continued
Features
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Channel Icons
Select or for the previous
or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10
channels at a time.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Category Icons
Select or to display and select a
SiriusXM® Radio category.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Scan Icon
Select to scan each channel.
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset
memory. Select and hold the preset
icon to store that station. Select
to display preset 7 onwards.
Skip Icons
Select or to change
section in the channel.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within the section.
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Station Art
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 241 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
242
Features
1. Select .
2. Select Tune Mode.
3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.
■
To Change the Tune Mode
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 188
Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off from
the Audio settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 314
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 242 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
243
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select to hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
3. Select Replace.
You can also store a channel by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
5. Select Combine.
■
Preset Memory
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset
memory.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 243 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
244
Features
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list.
2. Select the Channel List tab.
3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
4. Select the channel.
■
Listening to Featured Channels
1Listening to Featured Channels
Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel
list.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 244 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
245
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned
channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from
the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system
records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can
rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
1. Select .
2. Select Playback Position.
3. Move the gauge to the position you want to replay.
To play or pause on playback mode:
1. Select .
2. Select Play/Pause.
■ Returning to real-time broadcast
1. Select .
2. Select Play Live Broadcast.
■
Replay Function
1Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
the power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON. You
can go back to the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the
power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) as it erases
memory.
You can check how long the program has been
stored in memory from the audio/information touch
screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
automatically start deleting the oldest data.
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is
behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory
Audio/Information Touch Screen
(C)
(B)
(A)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 245 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
246
Features
While listening to SiriusXM® Radio, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from
your favorite teams.
■ To set up a favorite team
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select SportsFlash Setup (Favorite
Team).
6. Select a team.
■ To set up an alert message
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt).
6. Select On(one time) or On(continue).
■
Live Sports Alert
1Live Sports Alert
The sports alert function at SiriusXM® mode only.
1To set up a favorite team
Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings
disables the alert feature next time you set the power
mode to ON.
2 Customized Features P. 314
You can also set up a favorite team by the following
procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select .
3. Select Setting.
4. Select the SXM tab.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 246 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
■ To set up an alert beep
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep).
6. Select On.
■ Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
6. Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unset.
1To set up an alert beep
You can also set up an alert beep by the following
procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select .
3. Select Setting.
4. Select the SXM tab.
1Traffic and Weather Information
The traffic and weather information function in
SiriusXM® mode only.
You can also set up the traffic and weather
information by the following procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select .
3. Select Setting.
4. Select the SXM tab.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 247 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
248
Features
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.
1. Select Scan.
2. Select Scan Channels.
u To only scan preset stations, select Scan Songs in Presets.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.
■
Scan
1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on
TuneScan
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
The “Featured Channels” function is based on
Featured Favorites
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
TuneScan
TM
and Featured Favorites
TM
are registered
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 248 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Continued
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA,
or AAC
*1
format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Open/Close Icon
*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
(Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Folder Icons
Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the
beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
Audio/Information Screen
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 249 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
250
Features
1. Select and select Music Search.
2. Select a folder.
3. Select a track.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/
AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•
When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•
When you change the audio mode to CD.
•
When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 250 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
251
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
■ Scan
1. Select .
2. Select Scan.
3. Select a play mode.
■ Random/Repeat
Select a play mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 251 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
252
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Song Icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Cover Art
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Play/Pause Icon
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 252 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
1. Select and select Music Search.
2. Select the items on that menu.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information touch screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 284
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
on the audio/information touch screen.
Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay®, the
iPod/USB source is unavailable and audio files on the
phone can only be played within Apple CarPlay®.
Category Selection
Item Selection
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 253 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
254
Features
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
Select a play mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 254 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
255
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Continued
Features
Song By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice
commands.
■ To enable SBV
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Song by Voice.
6. Select On or Off.
Models with navigation system
1Song By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Setting options:
•
On (factory default): Song By Voice
TM
commands
are available.
•
Off: Disable the feature.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 255 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice
TM
(SBV)
256
Features
■ Searching for music using SBV
1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the (Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
USB flash drive and iPod.
3. Press the button and say a command.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back)
button on the steering wheel. The selected
song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.
1Searching for music using SBV
Song By Voice
TM
Commands List
2 Song By Voice Commands P. 236
NOTE:
Song By Voice
TM
commands are available for tracks
stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 257
SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlay®. Use
Siri® Eyes Free instead.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 256 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
257
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Features
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select New Modification.
7. Select USB or iPod.
■
Phonetic Modification
1Phonetic Modification
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed
out when Song By Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 257 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
258
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Features
8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist).
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
9. Select an entry to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
u To listen to the current phonetic
modification, select Play.
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, select Delete.
10.Select Modify.
11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to
use (e.g., ”Artist A”) when prompted.
12.Select OK.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the (Talk) button
and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist
A’” to play songs by the artist “No
Name.”
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 258 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
259
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
*
Continued
Features
Playing Pandora®
*
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a
compatible smartphone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using
your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
U.S. models
1Playing Pandora®
*
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is only available in certain countries.
Visit the Pandora website for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
If your phone is connected to Android Auto
TM
,
Pandora® is only available through the Android
Auto
TM
interface.
Visit the Android Auto
TM
website to check
compatibility.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Cover Art
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the
previous display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the
menu items.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 259 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
*
260
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Bookmark
• Station List
• New Station
• Sound
• Setting
■ Operating a menu item
1. Select .
2. Select an item.
■
Pandora® Menu
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information touch screen.
2 Pandora® P. 285
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station. It
also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 260 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
261
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Aha
TM
Features
Playing Aha
TM
Aha
TM
can be displayed and operated on the audio/information touch screen when
your smartphone is connected to the audio system by Wi-Fi or through Bluetooth®
with the HondaLink® app downloaded to your smartphone.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 272
2 HondaLink® P. 267
1Playing Aha
TM
Aha
TM
by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
You must have a previously set up Aha
TM
account
prior to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.
You want to select another source, select AUDIO on
the upper left of the screen. The source select screen
will appear. Select the source you want.
When Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto
TM
is
connected to the audio system, Aha
TM
can be
accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the
previous display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Audio/Information Screen
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 261 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
262
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Open/Close Icon
*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Folder Icons
Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip
to the beginning of the previous folder.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 262 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
263
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Select and select Music Search.
2. Select Music.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a track.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 288
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information touch screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 284
Select Switch USB Device in the Audio menu
screen to switch to another USB device.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 263 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
264
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
■ Scan
1. Select .
2. Select Scan.
3. Select a play mode.
■ Random/Repeat
Select a play mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 264 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
265
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
*1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not
be displayed.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible.
To check if your phone is compatible, visit
http://www.handsfreelink.com/Honda/.
It may be illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be
different.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay®
or Android Auto
TM
, Bluetooth® Audio from that
phone is unavailable. However, you can have a
second previously paired phone stream Bluetooth®
Audio by selecting Connect from Bluetooth
Device List.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
Audio/Information
Touch Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
Group Icons
Select or to
change group.
Pause Icon
Play Icon
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
Track Icons
Select or
to change tracks.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the
detailed
information.
Audio/Information
Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on and
off.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the
menu items.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to
the previous display.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 265 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
266
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
Select the play icon or pause icon.
1. Select .
2. Select Music Search.
3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
4. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
You can change the connected phone in the
Bluetooth® settings on the Audio menu screen by
the following procedure.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
■
Searching for Music
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 266 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
267
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 272
2 Phone Setup P. 380
■ Places
*
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to
the found locations via the navigation.
■ Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
■ Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service
center.
■
HondaLink® Menu
1HondaLink®
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
When Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto
TM
is
connected to the audio system, HondaLink® can be
accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 267 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
268
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
■ Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
■ Weather
Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can
change the ZIP Code at any time.
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.
■ To enable the HondaLink® service
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock/Info.
4. Select the HondaLink tab.
5. Select Diagnostic & Location Data.
6. Select On.
You need to allow the consent of the location
service to enable the HondaLink® service.
Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
■
To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 268 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
269
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
■ To link with HondaLink®
You can see the Connection Guide screen
after launching HondaLink®. If you do not
need this guide, select check-box and select
OK.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 269 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
270
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A message appears and notifies you of a
new message on the header area.
u When the message is received, a
notification ring can be heard.
2. A message icon is continuously displayed in
the header area until the new message is
read.
■
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Message
Icon
(yellow)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 270 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
271
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to
see the messages.
4. Select a new message to open.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 271 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
272
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features
Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the display audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites
or use online services on the audio/information touch screen. If your phone has cell
hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following
steps to setup.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Wi-Fi tab.
5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On.
6. Select Wi-Fi Network List.
u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is
in access point (tethering) mode.
u Select the phone you want to connect to
the system.
u If you do not find the phone you want to
connect in the list, select Scan.
7. Select Connect.
u Enter a password for your phone, and
select OK.
u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the list.
8. Select to go back to the home screen.
■
Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
You cannot go through the setting procedure while a
vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the
Wi-Fi connection.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
off with the icon on Wi-Fi Network List.
Transmission speed and others will not be displayed
on this screen.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 272 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
273
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
■
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-
Fi connection again after you boot your phone.
iPhone users
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 273 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
274
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®
Features
Apple CarPlay®
If you connect an Apple CarPlay®-compatible iPhone to the system via USB, you can
use the audio/information touch screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a
phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
1Apple CarPlay®
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlay®.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay® and when launching any compatible
apps.
To use Apple CarPlay®, connect the USB cable to the
front USB port. The USB port located in the center
console storage will not enable Apple CarPlay®
operation.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
To directly access the Apple CarPlay® phone function,
select Phone on the home screen. While connected
to Apple CarPlay®, calls are only made through Apple
CarPlay®. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay® OFF or detach
the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay® P. 276
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay®, it
is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay® is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay® is available, as well as information
pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 274 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
275
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®
Features
■ Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.
■ Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
■ Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.
■ Maps
Display Apple CarPlay® map and use the navigation function just as you would on
your iPhone.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay® map) can
give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
■
Apple CarPlay® Menu
1Apple CarPlay®
Apple CarPlay® Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay® requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay® functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay® functionality and
services. Honda cannot and does not provide any
warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay®
performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay®. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.
Home Screen Apple CarPlay® Menu
Go back to
the home
screen.
Apple CarPlay® Icon Go back to the Apple CarPlay® menu screen.
Models with navigation system
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 275 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®
276
Features
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via USB, use the following
procedure to set up Apple CarPlay®. Use of Apple CarPlay® will result in the
transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed,
and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay® experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information touch screen.
■ Enabling Apple CarPlay®
• Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
• Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
• Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Smartphone settings menu.
■
Setting Up Apple CarPlay®
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay®
You can also use the method below to set up Apple
CarPlay®:
Select HOME Settings Smartphone Apple
CarPlay
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay® is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 276 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
277
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®
Features
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri® Eyes Free.
■
Operating Apple CarPlay® with Siri® Eyes Free
1Operating Apple CarPlay® with Siri® Eyes Free
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri® Eyes Free:
•
What movies are playing today?
•
Call dad at work.
•
What song is this?
•
How’s the weather tomorrow?
•
Read my latest email.
•
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to activate Siri® Eyes Free.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
Press again to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 277 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
278
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
Android Auto
TM
When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via USB, Android
Auto
TM
is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto
TM
, you can use
the audio/information touch screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation),
Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto
TM
,
a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial
while safely parked before using Android Auto
TM
.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 280
1Android Auto
TM
To use Android Auto
TM
, you need to download the
Android Auto
TM
app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are
compatible with Android Auto
TM
. Bluetooth A2DP
cannot be used with Android Auto
TM
phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto
TM
and when launching any
compatible apps.
To use Android Auto
TM
, connect the USB cable to the
front USB port. The USB port in the center console
storage will not enable Android Auto
TM
operation.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 185
To directly access the Android Auto
TM
phone
function, select Phone on the home screen.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 280
When your Android phone is connected to Android
Auto
TM
, it is not possible to use Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto
TM
is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 278 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
279
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
a Maps (Navigation)
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto
TM
) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your
destination.
■
Android Auto
TM
Menu
1Android Auto
TM
For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto
TM
is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Android Auto
TM
homepage.
Android Auto
TM
Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto
TM
requires a compatible Android phone
with an active cellular connection and data plan.
Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto
TM
functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto
TM
functionality and
services. Honda cannot and does not provide any
warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto
TM
performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto
TM
. Refer to the
Android Auto
TM
homepage for information on
compatible apps.
: Go back to
the home screen.
Android Auto
TM
Icon
6
Models with navigation system
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 279 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
280
Features
b Phone (Communication)
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
c Google Now (Home screen)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto
TM
into simple cards that
appear just when they’re needed.
d Music and audio
Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto
TM
. To
switch between music apps, press this icon.
e Go back to the Home screen
f Voice
Operate Android Auto
TM
with your voice.
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via USB, Android Auto
TM
is
automatically initiated.
■ Enabling Android Auto
TM
• Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
• Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
• Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Smartphone settings menu.
■
Auto Pairing Connection
1Enabling Android Auto
TM
Only initialize Android Auto
TM
when you are safely
parked. When Android Auto
TM
first detects your
phone, you will need to set up your phone so that
auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction
manual that came with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android
Auto
TM
settings after you have completed the initial
setup:
Select HOME Settings Smartphone Android
Auto
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto
TM
is
governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 280 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
281
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto
TM
with your voice.
■
Operating Android Auto
TM
with Voice Recognition
1Operating Android Auto
TM
with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
•
Reply to text.
•
Call my wife.
•
Navigate to Honda.
•
Play my music.
•
Send a text message to my wife.
•
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto
TM
homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function
by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of
the screen.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to operate Android Auto
TM
with your voice.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate voice recognition.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 281 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
282
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Features
Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
■
Using Siri® Eyes Free
1Siri® Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri®
Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri® Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) Button
Press and hold until the display
changes as shown.
(Hang-up/back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.
While in Siri® Eyes Free:
The display remains the same. No
feedback or commands appear.
Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Siri® Eyes
Free
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 282 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
283
Features
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays
Error Message Cause Solution
Unplayable File Track/file format not supported
●
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Push Eject
*1
Bad Disc
Please check Owner’s
Manual
Please push eject button
*2
Mechanical error
●
Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
●
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2 Protecting CDs P. 290
●
If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
the disc.
●
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
●
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Mecha Error
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Servo error
Check Disc Disc error
●
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 290
Heat Error High temperature
●
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 283 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
284
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays
Error Message Solution
USB Error
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
*1
The connected USB device
has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual
*2
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Unsupported Version
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected,
reconnect the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 284 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
285
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Continued
Features
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the
audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
There is no station list in the device.
Please add the station list to your device.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a
station.
Music licenses force us to limit the number of
tracks you may skip each hour.
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the predetermined
number of times in an hour.
Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark
or
Unable to skip
Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.
No data
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and
reconnect the device.
PANDORA ver unsupport
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest
version.
PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.
Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped.
Check your mobile phone
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.
Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again
later.
●
Appears when data transfer has failed 10 times. Try again later.
●
Appears when condition for transferring data is unstable. Try again later.
Unable to play PANDORA. Music Licensing
restricts play in this area.
Appears when Pandora® service is not available in the current area.
U.S. models
Models with one display
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 285 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
286
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Error Message Solution
To begin listening, select a station from the
Stations list.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a
station.
Unable to rate track. Please try again.
Skip limit reached.
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the predetermined
number of times in an hour.
Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.
Unable to retrieve a track explanation. Please
try again later.
Unable to create bookmark. Please try again
later.
Appears when the commanded operation has failed. Try again later.
No Data
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and
reconnect the device.
Pandora App version is not supported
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest
version.
Unable to complete the operation. Please try
again later.
Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.
Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped,
check your mobile phone
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.
Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped,
check your mobile phone
Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install Pandora® app to
the your device.
Models with two displays
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 286 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
287
uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Features
Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error
occurs.
Error Message
*1
Solution
Unfortunately, **** has
stopped.
Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.
**** is not responding.
Would you like to close it?
App is not responding.
Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data
Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 337
Models with two displays
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 287 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
288
Features
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service
*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the screen, select Channel 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to
subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel,
or through the audio/information touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with
good reception.
Channel Not Subscribed:
You are not subscribed to the channel selected.
Subscription Updated:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
Channel Not Available:
No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Antenna Disconnected:
The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.
■
Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
■
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
■
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
•
US: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1-
800-852-9696
•
Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca, or
1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
•
In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
•
In tunnels
•
On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
•
Large items carried on the roof rack
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 288 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
289
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
Continued
Features
Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
■
CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 289 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
290
Features
■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●
Damaged CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
●
Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Warped Burrs
●
Small CDs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
●
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 290 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
291
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays
• A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
*1
iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) released between 2005 and 2010
*2
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5
*1
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s
*2
■
USB Flash Drives
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 291 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
292
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto
TM
Features
Models with two displays
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto
TM
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY® IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO
TM
IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO
TM
TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO
WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO
TM
APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO
TM
TERMS
OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE
DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION
(INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE
AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO
TM
, INCLUDING
THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING
OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO
TM
.
■
OWNER'S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 292 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
293
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto
TM
Features
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY® OR ANDROID AUTO
TM
(“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
■
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 293 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
294
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
Features
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System, then open the Others tab.
4. Select Detail Information.
5. Select About device.
6. Select Legal information.
7. Select Open source licenses.
Models with two displays
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 294 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
295
Continued
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the
SETTINGS button, rotate to select a setting item, and press .
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
•
Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
•
Shift to (P.
Models with one display
1How to customize
To customize other features, rotate , and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 302
SETTINGS Button
Audio/Information Screen
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 295 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
296
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ Customization flow
Clock Format
Background Color
Header Clock Display
Factory Data Reset
Clock Adjustment
Press the SETTINGS button.
Language
Default
Edit Pairing Code
Bluetooth On/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Voice Prompt
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Beep
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Type
Wallpaper
System
Settings
Voice
Recog
Bluetooth
Display
Clock
Others
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 296 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
297
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Memory Position Link
Vehicle
Settings
Meter
Setup
TPMS Calibration
Driving Position Setup
*
Language Selection
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
ACC Display Speed Unit
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Remote Start System ON/OFF
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 297 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
298
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Keyless Access Light Flash
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Door Unlock Mode
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset
Default
Keyless
Access
Setup
Lighting
Setup
Door
Setup
Maintenance Info.
Keyless Access Beep
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 298 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
299
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Wallpaper
Source Select Popup
Clock Type
Sound
Default
Cover Art
*1
Connect Audio
*1
Bluetooth Device List
*1
Default
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Audio
Settings
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Info
Settings
*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 299 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
300
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect
Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Default
Enable Text Message
Message Auto Reading
New Text Message Alert
Phone
Settings
Connect
Phone
Text
Messages
Bluetooth
Device
List
Phone
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 300 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
301
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Display
Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Default
Default
Default
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Camera
Settings
LaneWatch
Rear
Camera
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 301 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
302
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Settings
Display
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.
—
Beep
Selects whether a beeper sounds when you
operate the selector knob.
On
*1
/Off
Blue-
tooth
Bluetooth On/Off Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. On
*1
/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 347
—
Edit Pairing Code
Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 349
Random/Fixed
*1
Voice
Recog
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. Beginner
*1
/Expert
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 302 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
303
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Settings
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Type Changes the clock display type.
Analog/Digital
*1
/
Small Digital/Off
Wallpaper
●
Changes the wallpaper type.
●
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
●
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 193
Blank/Galaxy
*1
/
Metallic/Add New
Clock Adjustment
Adjusts Clock.
2 Clock P. 118
—
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H
*1
/24H
Others
Language Changes the display language.
English
*1
/French/
Spanish
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.
Blue
*1
/Amber/Red/
Green
Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On
*1
/Off
Factory Data Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 313
Yes/No
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 303 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
304
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel
*1
/Calibrate
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
Forward Collision Warning
Distance
Changes at which distance the CMBS
TM
alerts. Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of
the ACC range.
On/Off
*1
ACC Display Speed Unit
Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi-
information display.
mph
*1
/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h
*1
(Canada)
Road Departure Mitigation
Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
On/Off
*1
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 304 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
305
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Meter
Setup
Language Selection
Changes the displayed language on the multi-
information display.
English
*1
/French/
Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Remote Start System ON/
OFF
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Driving
Position
Setup
*
Memory Position Link
Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting.
On
*1
/Off
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 305 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
306
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Keyless
Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/
All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
either front door handle.
On
*1
/Off
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60seconds/
30seconds
*1
/
15seconds
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver's door.
60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds
*1
/
0seconds
Auto Light Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.
Max/High/Mid
*1
/
Low/Min
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 306 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
307
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Door
Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed
*1
/
Shift from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens
*1
/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.
Driver Door
*1
/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On
*1
/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening any door.
90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds
*1
Mainte-
nance
Info.
Maintenance Reset
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
—
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 307 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
308
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
Settings
Sound
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 195
-6 ~ C
*1
~ +6 (Bass and
Treble), -9 ~ C
*1
~ +9
(Fader and Balance),
Off/Low/Mid
*1
/High
(SVC)
Source Select Popup
Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when the AUDIO button is
pressed.
On/Off
*1
Cover Art
Turns on and off the cover art display. On
*1
/Off
Connect Audio
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
—
Bluetooth Device List
Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.
—
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.
Yes/No
iPod, USB, or Pandora®
*
mode
Bluetooth® Audio or Pandora®
*
mode
Bluetooth® Audio or Pandora®
*
mode
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 308 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
309
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Info
Settings
Clock/
Wall-
paper
type
Clock Type
See System Settings on P. 302 to P. 303
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 309 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
310
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Settings
Connect Phone
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 347
—
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 347
—
Phone
Edit Speed Dial
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 358
—
Auto Transfer
Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On
*1
/Off
Auto Answer
Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.
On/Off
*1
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone.
Fixed/Mobile
Phone
*1
/Off
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On
*1
/Off
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 310 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
311
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Settings
Text
Messages
Enable Text Message Turns the text message function on and off. On
*1
/Off
New Text Message Alert
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text message.
On/Off
*1
Message Auto Reading
Sets the system to automatically read an
incoming text message.
●
On- A text message is always read aloud.
●
Off- A text message is not read aloud.
●
Auto- A text message is read aloud only when
driving.
On/Off/Auto
*1
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 311 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
312
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Settings
Lane-
Watch
Show with Turn Signal
Select whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.
On
*1
/Off
Reference Lines
Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Display
Brightness
Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings. —
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.
Yes/No
Rear
Camera
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.
Yes/No
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 312 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
313
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other,
then Factory Data Reset.
u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to
reset the settings.
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press to select OK.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
•
Audio preset settings
•
Phonebook entries
•
Other display and each item settings.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 313 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
314
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information touch screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item.
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
•
Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
•
Shift to (P.
To customize other features, select Settings.
2 List of customizable options P. 323
Models with two displays
Audio/Information
Touch Screen
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 314 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
315
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■ Customization flow
Select Settings.
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Sound/Beep
System
Display
Display Settings
Background Color
Guidance Volume
Text Message Volume
Select .
Voice Recog Voice Prompt
Blue
Amber
Red
Violet
Voice Recog. Volume
Beep Volume
Voice Recog. Volume
Song by Voice
*
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification
*
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Automatic Phone Sync
One Press Voice Operation
Verbal Reminder
*
Blue Green
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 315 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
316
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Language
Default
System
Others
Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
*
Clock Clock
Wallpaper
Manual Time Zone
*
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
Touch Panel Sensitivity
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone
*
Detail Information
Factory Data Reset
Clock Reset
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 316 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
317
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Vehicle
Driver Assist
System Setup
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Meter Setup Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Driving Position
Setup
*
Memory Position Link
TPMS Calibration
ACC Display Speed Unit
Head-up Warning
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 317 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
318
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Door Setup Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance
Info
Maintenance Reset
Default
Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Keyless Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System On/Off
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 318 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
319
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Sound
Audio
Common
Audio Source Pop-Up
Cover Art
HD Radio Mode
*
FM/AM
RDS INFO
SXM
*
Tune Start
SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt)
SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep)
SportsFlash Setup(Favorite Team)
Traffic & Weather Setup
Bluetooth Device List
Default
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 319 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
320
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
*
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone
*
Manual Time Zone
*
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
Clock Reset
Other Info Screen Preference
Default
Clock/Info
HondaLink Diagnostic & Location Data
Clock
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 320 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
321
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Bluetooth Device List
Default
Phone
Phone
Edit Speed Dial
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist
Text/Email Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification
Camera
Show with Turn Signal
LaneWatch
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
Reference Line
Default
Rear Camera Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 321 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
322
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Bluetooth On/Off Status
Default
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi On/Off Status
Wi-Fi Network List
Wi-Fi Information
Smartphone
Apple CarPlay/
Android Auto
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 322 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
323
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Display
Display
Settings
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
touch screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information touch
screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
touch screen.
—
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information touch screen.
Blue
*1
/Amber/Red/
Violet/Blue Green
Sound/
Beep
Guidance Volume
Changes the sound volume.
Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation system.
1~6
*1
~11
Text Message Volume Changes the text/e-mail message reading volume. 1~6
*1
~11
Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6
*1
~11
Verbal Reminder
*
Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On
*1
/Off
Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Off/1/2
*1
/3
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 323 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
324
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Voice
Recog
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On
*1
/Off
Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6
*1
~11
Song by Voice
*
Turns the Song By Voice
TM
on and off. On
*1
/Off
Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification
*
Modifies a voice command for music stored in the
system or an iPod/iPhone.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 257
—
Phonebook Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.
2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 389
—
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets phonebook and call history data to be
automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
On/Off
One Press Voice Operation
Changes the setting of the touch screen operation
when using the voice operation.
On/Off
*1
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 324 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
325
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Changes the clock display type.
Analog/Digital
*1
/
Small Digital/Off
Wallpaper
●
Changes the wallpaper type.
●
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
●
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
Galaxy
*1
/Metallic/
Blank
Clock Adjustment
*
Adjusts clock. —
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H
*1
/24H
Auto Time Zone
*
Automatically adjusts the clock when driving through
different time zones.
On
*1
/Off
Manual Time Zone
*
Changes the time zone manually. —
Auto Daylight
Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust the
clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to cancel this
function.
On
*1
/Off
Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On
*1
/Off
Clock Reset Resets the clock settings to the factory default. Yes/No
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 325 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
326
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Others
Language Changes the display language.
English
*1
/French/
Spanish
Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low
*1
Detail Information Displays the Android setting items. —
Factory Data Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 337
Yes/No
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System
settings group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 326 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
327
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel
*1
/Calibrate
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes distance the CMBS
TM
alerts.
Long/Normal
*1
/
Short
Head-up Warning Turns the head-up warning lights on to flash or off. On
*1
/Off
ACC Pre-Running Car
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a
vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC
range.
On/Off
*1
ACC Display Speed Unit
Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi-
information display.
mph
*1
/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h
*1
(Canada)
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation
system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
On/Off
*1
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 327 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
328
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Meter
Setup
Language Selection
Changes the displayed language on the multi-
information display.
English
*1
/French/
Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and
average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset
*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and
average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset
*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 328 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
329
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Driving
Position
Setup
*
Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and off. On
*1
/Off
Keyless
Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/
All Doors
Keyless Access Light
Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/
lock the doors.
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the
doors.
On
*1
/Off
Remote Start System On/
Off
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60 sec/30 sec
*1
/
15 sec
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on
after you close the driver’s door.
60 sec/30 sec/
15 sec
*1
/0 sec
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Max/High/Mid
*1
/
Low/Min
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 329 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
330
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Door
Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically
lock.
With Vehicle
Speed
*1
/Shift from
P/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically
unlock.
All Doors When
Driver’s Door
Opens
*1
/All Doors
When Shift to
Park/All Doors
When Ignition
Switching Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first push of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door
*1
/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On
*1
/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle
without opening any door.
90 sec/60 sec/30
sec
*1
Mainte-
nance
Info.
Maintenance Reset
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
—
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle
group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 330 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
331
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
Common
Sound
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 230
-6 ~ 0
*1
~ +6 (BASS
and TREBLE),
RR9~0
*1
~FR9
(FADER), L9~
*1
0~R9
(BALANCE), -6 ~ 0
*1
~ +6 (Subwoofer),
Off/Low/Mid
*1
/
High (Speed
Volume
Compensation)
Audio Source Pop-
Up
Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
comes on when Audio is selected on the home
screen.
On/Off
*1
[Your selected media]
Cover Art
Turns the cover art display on and off. On
*1
/Off
Bluetooth Device
List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired
phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
—
FM/AM
HD Radio Mode
*
Selects whether the audio system automatically
switches to the digital radio waves or receives the
analogue waves only.
Auto
*1
/Analog
RDS INFO Turns on and off the RDS information. On
*1
/Off
iPod or USB mode
FM/AM mode
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 331 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
332
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
SXM
*
Tune Start
Turns on and off, starts the song from the beginning as
you change preset stations.
On
*1
/Off
SportsFlash
Setup(Interrupt)
Turns on and off the sports alert function.
Off
*1
/
On(one time)/
On(continue)
SportsFlash
Setup(Interrupt
Beep)
Causes the system to beep when the sports alert is
notified.
On
*1
/Off
SportsFlash
Setup(Favorite
Team)
Selects your favorite sports teams.
2 Live Sports Alert P. 246
—
Traffic & Weather
Setup
Selects the region you want to receive the information. —
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
settings group as default.
Yes/No
SiriusXM
®
mode
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 332 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
333
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Clock/
Info
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock
See
System
on P. 323
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
*
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone
*
Manual Time Zone
*
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
Clock Reset
HondaLink
Diagnostic & Location
Data
Turns HondaLink® on and off. On/Off
Other
Info Screen
Preference
Changes the information screen type. Info Menu
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock/Info
settings group as default.
Yes/No
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 333 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
334
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Phone
Bluetooth Device
List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a
paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
—
Edit Speed Dial
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 386
—
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone.
Fixed/Mobile
Phone
*1
Automatic Phone
Sync
Sets phonebook and call history data to be
automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On
*1
/Off
HondaLink Assist Turns HondaLink Assist on and off. On/Off
*1
Text/Email
Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and off. On
*1
/Off
Select Account Selects a text or e-mail message account. —
New Message
Notification
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen
when HFL receives a new text/e-mail messages.
On/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
settings group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 334 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
335
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear
camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 480
On
*1
/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 480
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera setting group as default.
Yes/No
LaneWatch
Show with Turn
Signal
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a
right turn.
On
*1
/Off
Display Time after
Turn Signal Off
Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display
stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the
center.
0 second
*1
/
2 seconds
Reference Line
Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.
Yes/No
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 335 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
336
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Bluetooth/
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Bluetooth On/Off
Status
Selects to change the Bluetooth® status. On
*1
/Off
Bluetooth Device
List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired
phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
—
Edit Pairing Code
Edits a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 381
Random/Fixed
*1
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi On/Off Status Changes the Wi-Fi mode. On
*1
/Off
Wi-Fi Network List
Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi
device.
—
Wi-Fi Information Shows the Wi-Fi information of the device. —
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default.
Yes/No
Smartphone Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Sets up the Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto
TM
connection.
Enable Once/
Always Enable/
Cancel
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 336 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
337
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen.
6. Select Yes.
7. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u After selecting Yes, the system will
reboot.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
2 HondaLink® P. 267
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 337 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
338
Features
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.
Training HomeLink
If it is necessary to erase a previously entered
learned code:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but
may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener,
visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.
■
Important Safety Precautions
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Red Indicator
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 338 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
339
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
uTraining HomeLink
Features
■
Training a Button
1Training HomeLink
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
1.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
2.
Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow
steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.” You do not
need to press and release the HomeLink button
again in step 2.
Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.
Standard transmitter
Indicator remains on for
about 25 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
4.
3.
2.
5.
A.
B.
1.
Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote
transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to
constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?
Press and release the HomeLink button. Press
and release the button on the remote every 2
secs.
Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from
slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly
blinking? The process should take less than 60
seconds.
Training
Complete
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete
The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks.
HomeLink LED is
constantly on.
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 339 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
340
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•
U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be On.
2 Customized Features P. 295
Voice control tips
•
Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
•
Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
•
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•
To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Models with one display
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up
Button
Volume down
Selector
Knob
PHONE
Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 340 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
341
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uUsing HFL
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 358
■
HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 295
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level
Status
Roam Status
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Disabled Option
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 341 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
342
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
■ Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
Pair a phone to the system.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.
Connect
Phone
*1
Bluetooth
Device List
Add Bluetooth Device
Edit PIN
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
*1:
(Existing
entry list)
Replace This
Device
Delete This
Device
Delete a previously paired phone.
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Add
Bluetooth
Device
Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.
Pair a phone to the system.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 342 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
343
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Manual Input
New Entry
Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook
Enter a phone number to store as a
speed dial number.
Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit
Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●
Change a number.
●
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete
Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.
(Existing
entry list)
Delete All
Edit Speed
Dial
*1
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync
*1
Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
Phone
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 343 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
344
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Turn the text message function on and off.
New Text Message Alert
Message Auto Reading
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text message.
Set the system to automatically read an incoming text message.
Text Messages
*1
Default
Enable Text Message
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 344 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
345
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Phone menu
Speed Dial
Redial
Call History Text messages
Dial
Phonebook
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Call
History
*1
Speed Dial
*1
All
Manual Input
Dialed
Received
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
New Entry
Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
More Speed Dials
Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Missed
Display the last 20 missed calls.
Dial
*1
Redial
*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 345 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
346
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
See the previous message.
Text Messages
*1
Read/Stop
Previous Message
Next Message
See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
Phonebook
*1
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Message is read
aloud.
Reply
Call
Reply to a received message using one of
six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
Select a message
and press .
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 346 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
347
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•
Up to six phones can be paired.
•
Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
•
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 357
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 347 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
348
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 348 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
349
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code.
3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,
then press .
1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
Edit Pairing Code
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 349 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
350
Features
■ To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
4. Rotate to select Replace This Device,
then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 350 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
351
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. Rotate to select Delete This Device,
then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 351 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
352
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To turn on or off the text message
function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Text Messages, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text Message.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■
To Set Up Text Message Options
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 352 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
353
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To turn on or off the text message
notice
1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate
to select New Text Message Alert, then
press .
2. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■ To set up the auto reading option
1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate
to select Message Auto Reading, then
press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto then
press .
1To turn on or off the text message notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message is always read aloud.
Off: A text message is not read aloud.
Auto: A text message is read aloud only when
driving.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 353 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
354
Features
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Rotate to select, then press .
Press to delete. Press OK to enter the
security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.
■
To Create a Security PIN
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 354 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
355
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .
■
Automatic Transferring
■
Auto Answer
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 355 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
356
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.
3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model
of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone
will sound if the phone is connected.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 356 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
357
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 357 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
358
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
3. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Rotate to
select Yes or No, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
■
Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.
Mr.AAA
111AAA####
555EEE####
444DDD####
333CCC####
222BBB####
Mr.EEE
Mr.DDD
Mr.CCC
Mr.BBB
Select a method to store
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 358 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
359
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 359 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
360
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 360 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
361
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Voice-tagged speed dial entries, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the button and say “Call” and the
phonebook name, phone number, or stored voice
tag.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
Phone menu
Speed Dial
Redial
Call History Text messages
Dial
Phonebook
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 361 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
362
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a name, then press .
u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 341
2 Speed Dial P. 358
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 362 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
363
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 341
2 Speed Dial P. 358
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 363 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
364
Features
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Rotate to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate to select All, Dialed, Received,
or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Select More Speed Dials to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that
list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 358
Voice-tagged speed dial entries, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the
corresponding preset buttons from the Phone
screen.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 364 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
365
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 365 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
366
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
Pres the MENU button to display the options.
Rotate to select the mute option, then
press .
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
Mute Icon
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 366 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
367
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message.
2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
.
■
Receiving a Text Message
1Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message feature. Only use the text message feature
when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text message for the first time
after the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to
turn the New Text Message Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text message notice
P. 353
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 367 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
368
Features
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Text Messages, then
press .
4. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■
Displaying Text Messages
1Displaying Text Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message
will also be deleted from the system. If you send a
message from the system, the message goes to your
phone’s outbox.
To see the previous or next message, press on the
text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Previous Message or Next Message,
then press .
Message List
Text Message
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 368 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
369
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ Using the Stop or Read option
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 368
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Stop or Read, then
press .
■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 368
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Reply, then press .
4. Rotate to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
1Using the Stop or Read option
This option changes to:
•
Stop while the text message is read out. Select this
option to discontinue the message read out.
•
Read when the system has finished reading out the
text message, or after you selected Stop.
Select this option to hear the system read out the
selected message.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
•
Talk to you later, I’m driving.
•
I’m on my way.
•
I’m running late.
•
OK
•
Yes
•
No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 369 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
370
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 368
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Call, then press .
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 370 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
371
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•
U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status
setting must be On. If there is an active connection to
Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto
TM
, HFL is unavailable.
2 How to customize P. 314
Voice control tips
•
Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
•
Press the button when you want to call a
number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
•
If the microphones pick up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•
To change the volume level, select the audio
system's VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
controls on the steering wheel.
Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among
a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entry
in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 386
Up to five call histories can be displayed among a
total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.
Models with two displays
(Talk) Button
Volume up
Microphone
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button
Volume down MENU Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 371 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
372
Features
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen, or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous
command, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
MENU button: Press to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the phone
screen.
To go to the Phone menu screen:
1. Select .
2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen.
3. Select .
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 372 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
373
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uUsing HFL
Features
The audio/information screen and audio/information touch screen notify you when
there is an incoming call.
■
HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen and audio/information touch
screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language.
2 How to customize P. 314
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Roaming Status
Audio/information touch screen
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Audio/information screen
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
Battery Level Status
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 373 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
374
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or
numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 386
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 374 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
375
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
■ Phone settings screen
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Phone.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
Disconnect a paired phone
from the system.
Bluetooth Device List
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect
Delete
Delete a paired phone.
Add Bluetooth Device
Pair a new phone to the system.
Phone
Connect a paired device to
the system.
Connect
Connect
Connect
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 375 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
376
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Manual Input
New Entry
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Edit
Delete
(Existing entry list)
Edit Speed Dial
Delete All
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●
Change a name.
●
Change a number.
●
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Ring Tone
Select the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.
HondaLink Assist
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 376 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
377
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Select Account
Enable Text/Email
Text/Email
New Message Notification
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.
Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.
Default
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 377 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
378
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Phone menu screen
1. Select .
2. Select Phone.
3. Select .
Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Call History
Speed Dial
All
Manual Input
Dialed
Received
Display the last outgoing calls.
Display the last incoming calls.
New Entry
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Missed
Display the last missed calls.
Dial
Redial
Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Phonebook
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 378 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
379
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
See the previous message.
Text/Email
Read/Stop
(Existing a message list)
See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
Select Account
Select a mail or text message account.
Reply to a received message using one of six
fixed phrases.
Call
Make a call to the sender.
Reply
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 379 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
380
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Yes.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select Continue.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, search for
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information touch screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive hands-
free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•
Up to six phones can be paired.
•
Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
•
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay®,
pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is
unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed
out from the Bluetooth Device List screen.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 380 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
381
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
4. Select Connect , Connect , or
Connect .
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Bluetooth tab.
5. Select Edit Pairing Code.
6. Select Random or Fixed.
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device
from the Bluetooth device list screen.
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 381 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
382
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.
4. Select Delete.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 382 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
383
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New
Message Notification.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■
To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options
1To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options
To use the text message/e-mail function, it may be
necessary to set up on your phone.
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 383 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
384
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Ring Tone.
3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model
of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone
will sound if the phone is connected.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 384 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
385
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Select On or Off.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
Pref
Blank
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 385 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
386
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Select Yes or No.
5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the
speed dial entry.
u Using the button, follow the prompts
to store a voice tag for the speed dial
entry.
■
Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag
name.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 386 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
387
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record, or use the button and
follow the prompts to complete the voice
tag.
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.
For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 387 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
388
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To edit a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select a setting you want.
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 388 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
389
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to add
phonetic modification to.
■
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 389 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
390
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
7. Select New Voice Tag.
8. Select a contact name you want to add to.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
9. Select Modify.
10. Using Record or the button, follow the
prompts to complete the voice tag.
11. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 390 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
391
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To modify a voice tag
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to modify
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to
modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
8. Select Modify.
9. Using Record or the button, follow the
prompts to complete the voice tag.
10. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the
currently connected phone.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 391 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
392
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a modified voice tag
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Select Delete.
u The selected contact name has been
selected.
9. Select OK.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 392 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
393
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete all modified voice tags
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
u The contact name list appears.
7. Select Delete All.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen, then select Yes.
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Voice-tagged speed dial entries can be dialed by
voice from most screens.
Press the button and say the voice tag name.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlay®, phone calls cannot be made with
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® and are only made from
Apple CarPlay®.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 393 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
394
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Phonebook.
3. Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select
Search.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering name, if multiple numbers exist
select a number.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select Dial.
u Dialing starts automatically.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 394 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
395
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using the Call History
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Call History.
3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last
number dialed.
1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed,
received, or missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the
system.)
1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 386
Voice-tagged speed dial entries can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 395 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
396
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
incoming call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
touch screen instead of the and buttons.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 396 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
397
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the audio/information touch screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
touch screen.
Audio/information screen
Mute Icon
Mute Icon
Audio/information touch screen
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 397 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
398
Features
HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or e-mail.
2. Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text message or e-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.
■
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
The system can only receive massages that are sent a
text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the
data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages and e-mails.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/e-mail feature. Only use the text message/e-mail
feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text message or e-mail for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Message Notification
setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
P. 383
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 398 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
399
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Select
Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Message or an e-mail account
you want.
■
Selecting a Mail Account
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.
Select
Account
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 399 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
400
Features
■ Displaying text messages
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Text/Email.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■
Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message
will also be deleted from the system. If you send a
message from the system, the message goes to your
phone’s outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select or
on the message screen.
Message List
Text Message
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 400 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
401
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ Displaying e-mails
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Text/Email.
u Select Select Account if necessary.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a message.
u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.
Folder List
Message List
E-mail
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 401 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
402
Features
■ Read or Stop reading a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 400
2. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the
message from the beginning.
■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 400
2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
•
Talk to you later, I’m driving.
•
I’m on my way.
•
I’m running late.
•
OK
•
Yes
•
No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 402 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
403
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 403 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
404
Features
■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition will be sent to the
operator; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.
■
In Case of Emergency
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when:
•
You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
•
There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 404 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
405
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To enable notification
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink
Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
1To enable notification
Setting options:
•
On: Notification is available.
•
Off: Disable the feature.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 405 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
406
Features
Compass
*
When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass
display appears.
Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold for five seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
settings screen.
3. Select Calibration.
4. Select Calibration Start.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.
1Compass
*
Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
•
Driving near power lines or stations
•
Crossing a bridge
•
Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
•
When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass, select to cancel the
setting mode and return to the previous screen.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 406 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
407
uuCompass
*
uCompass Zone Selection
Features
Compass Zone Selection
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold for five seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
settings screen.
3. Select Zone Adjust.
u The display shows the current zone
number the system is set to.
4. Select the zone number of your area (See
Zone Map).
1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Zone Map
Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 407 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
408
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 408 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
409
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 410
Maximum Load Limit........................ 413
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle........................ 415
When Driving
Turning on the Power ...................... 416
Precautions While Driving................. 421
Transmission .................................... 421
Shifting............................................ 422
ECON Button ................................... 424
SPORT Mode.................................... 425
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System...... 426
Front Sensor Camera ....................... 427
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)......... 429
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
System ....................................... 443
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 447
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System........... 454
LaneWatch
TM
................................... 456
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 458
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 460
High Voltage Battery........................ 462
Braking
Brake System ................................... 463
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 465
Brake Assist System ......................... 466
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ....................................... 467
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 475
Parking Sensor System
*
................... 476
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 480
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 482
How to Refuel ................................. 483
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing
CO
2
Emissions................................ 484
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 409 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
410
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 516
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
■
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 410 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
411
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 126
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 163
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 158
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 157
■
Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 411 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
412
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 41
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 74
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 412 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
413
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire
and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 564
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 564
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 413 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
414
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 414 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
415
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 561
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 415 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
416
Driving
When Driving
Turning on the Power
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N, it is safer to start it in (P.
1When Driving
When you set the power mode to ON, you may feel
as if the brake pedal is sinking down. This is normal.
1Turning on the Power
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the power system.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When turning on the power system in cold weather,
turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights,
climate control system, and rear defogger in order to
reduce the 12-volt battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Brake Pedal
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 416 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
417
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
Driving
3. Press the POWER button without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
4. Check the READY indicator.
u Keep depressing the brake pedal until
the READY indicator comes on.
u The READY indicator comes on when
the power system is on and you can start
driving.
u If the outside temperature is extremely
low, you cannot drive until conditions are
improved. In this case, the READY
indicator does not come on, as well as a
warning message appears on the multi-
information display.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning
and Information Messages P. 88
1Turning on the Power
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the power
system does not activate.
2 Immobilizer System P. 134
Bring the smart entry remote close to the POWER
button if the battery in the smart entry remote is
weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 546
The power system may not activate if the smart entry
remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
If the smart entry remote battery is low, touch the
POWER button with the remote.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 546
The engine may not run when the vehicle is ready for
driving.
You can start driving with the READY indicator on.
If you press the POWER button while depressing the
brake pedal with the READY indicator on, the power
mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) and you cannot
start driving.
2 READY Indicator P. 75
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 417 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
418
Driving
You can remotely turn the power system on using the smart entry remote.
■ To turn the power system on
The power system is on for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle.
To extend the time for another 10 minutes during the first 10 minutes, press the
button, then press and hold the button.
u The turn signal lights come back on three times, twice, if a 10-minute
extension request was transmitted successfully.
■
Remote Engine Start
1Remote Engine Start
If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
While the vehicle is moving, the range may be
reduced.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
The power system may not be turned on by the remote
engine start if:
•
You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the multi-information display, audio/
information screen
*
, or audio/information touch
screen
*
.
•
The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
•
The shift lever is in a position other than (P.
•
The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
•
You have already used the remote twice to turn the
power system on.
•
Another registered smart entry remote is in the
vehicle.
3
WARNING
Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or
cause unconsciousness.
Never use the remote engine starter when
the vehicle is parked in a garage or other
area with limited ventilation.
Press the button, then press and hold the button.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 418 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
419
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
Driving
■ To turn the power system off
1Remote Engine Start
•
There is any antenna failure.
•
Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
•
The engine oil pressure is low.
•
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
•
The security system alarm is not set.
The power system may be turned off while it is on if:
•
You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
turning the power system on with the button
on the smart entry remote.
•
The power system is turned off by using the smart
entry remote.
•
Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
•
The hood is open.
•
The shift lever is in a position other than (P.
•
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
•
The engine oil pressure is low.
•
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on if
there is a problem with the emissions control
systems.
While the power system is on, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
•
The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode.
When it is cold outside:
•
The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
•
The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are
activated.
Press and hold the button
for one second.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 419 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
420
Driving
You can turn the power system off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Shift to
(P.
2. Press the POWER button.
1. While depressing the brake pedal, press the POWER button.
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, check that the READY indicator is on,
then release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone
off.
2 Parking Brake P. 463
3. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Move the shift lever to
(D or when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.
■
Stopping the Power System
■
Starting to Drive
1Starting to Drive
The power system is off when the shift lever is moved
out of
(P before the POWER button is pressed.
Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.
When the power system is turned on using the button
on the smart entry remote
When the power system is turned on using the button on the smart entry remote
When the power system is turned on in any case
B
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
As a hybrid vehicle, the sounds and vibrations from
the engine may be absent even though the vehicle is
ready for driving. It also makes you fail to recognize
that you can start.
Make sure to check if the READY indicator is on
before you start to drive.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 420 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
421
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the power
system or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
Transmission
As with a conventional gasoline-powered vehicle with an automatic transmission,
this vehicle will creep.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the vehicle
to react similar to an automatic transmission vehicle, unexpectedly increasing vehicle
speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and
curves.
■
In Rain
■
Other Precautions
■
Creeping
■
Kickdown
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
driving, the power system will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in
(N, as you will lose
regenerative braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 421 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
422
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
1Shifting
While the High Voltage battery level is full, or the
High Voltage battery temperature is low,
regenerative braking may become less effective.
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in
(P.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Park
Used when parking or turning the
power on or off.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Propulsion power is not transmitted to
wheels.
Drive
Used for normal driving.
Release Button
Drive (B)
Used when driving down a long hill and
to increase regenerative braking.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 422 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
423
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
When you change the shift lever from
(D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 423 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
424
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button
Driving
ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your driving range by adjusting the performance
of the climate control system.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 424 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
425
uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode
Driving
SPORT Mode
To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button.
The SPORT mode increases engine performance and handling.
This mode is not recommended for fuel economy enhancement, but suitable for
driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads.
The SPORT mode is turned off every time you start the power system, even if you
turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.
SPORT Button
SPORT Mode Indicator
Press
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 425 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
426
uuWhen DrivinguAcoustic Vehicle Alerting System
Driving
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System
Alerts pedestrians when a vehicle is propelled solely by electricity, approaching at
speeds around 12 mph (20 km/h) or less.
Press the button to turn the system on and
off.
u The indicator in the button comes on
when the system is off.
The system is turned on every time you turn
the power system on, even if you turned it off
the last time you drove the vehicle.
■
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System Button
Canadian models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 426 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
427
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera
Continued
Driving
Front Sensor Camera
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBS
TM
, is designed to
detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.
■
Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Front Sensor
Camera
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 427 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera
428
Driving
1Front Sensor Camera
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
•
Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
•
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
•
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 428 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
429
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Continued
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the
brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a
safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.
Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly
impacted.
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
Use ACC only when driving on
expressways or freeways in good
weather conditions.
3
WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability.
When your vehicle speed drops below
22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will
automatically cancel and no longer will
apply your vehicle’s brakes.
Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal when conditions require.
When to use
■
Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
■
Shift position for ACC: In (D.
The radar sensor is
at the lower part of
the front bumper.
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 429 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
430
Driving
■ How to activate the system
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or
off.
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 434
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by
pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
Do not use ACC under the following conditions:
•
On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
•
On roads with sharp turns.
•
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain
the set speed.
•
On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
How to use
■
Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.
ACC (green) is on in the
multi-information
display.
ACC is ready to use.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 430 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
431
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press down the –/SET button when you reach the
desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC
begins.
When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon,
interval bars and set speed appear on the
multi-information display.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the multi-information display
between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
On when ACC
begins
Press and release
−/SET Button
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Interval
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 431 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
432
Driving
■ There is a vehicle ahead
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected
doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order
to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-Interval P. 437
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you
and is detected by the radar and the camera,
your vehicle starts to slow down.
■
When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down
abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in
front of you, the beeper sounds and a message
appears on the multi-information display.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start
accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
•
The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
•
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle
detected in front of you comes in and goes out of the
ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Pre-Running
Car Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
Beep
ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
A vehicle icon appears on the
multi-information display.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 432 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
433
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
■ There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to
the set speed, and then maintains it.
■ When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC range.
ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the
system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a
vehicle ahead is within the ACC range.
1When in Operation
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not
work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 434
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the multi-
information display.
1When you depress the accelerator pedal
While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system
does not apply the brakes to keep the following-
interval, as well as the BRAKE message on the multi-
information display does not appear.
2 When in Operation P. 432
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 433 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
434
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
■ Vehicle conditions
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the radar sensor cover is dirty.
• When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats.
• When tire chains are installed.
■
ACC Conditions and Limitations
1ACC Conditions and Limitations
The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision
mitigation braking system
TM
(CMBS
TM
).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 467
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN
button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
•
The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
•
You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
•
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 434 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
435
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Continued
Driving
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 435 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
436
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
• Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
following-interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 436 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
437
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Continued
Driving
Press the (interval) button to change the
ACC following-interval.
Each time you press the button, the following-
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through short,
middle, long, and extra long following-
intervals.
Determine the most appropriate following-
interval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-interval requirements set by local
regulation.
■
To Set or Change Following-Interval
Interval Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 437 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
438
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.
Vehicle Interval
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
84 feet
26 meters
1.1 sec
102 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
111 feet
34 meters
1.5 sec
139 feet
43 meters
1.5 sec
Long
155 feet
48 meters
2.1 sec
202 feet
62 meters
2.1 sec
Extra
Long
215 feet
66 meters
3.0 sec
285 feet
87 meters
3.0 sec
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 438 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
439
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
To cancel ACC, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u The ACC indicator (green) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed
while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button
when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press
the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the
desired speed.
CANCEL
Button
MAIN
Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 439 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
440
Driving
■ Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when
ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to
automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBS
TM
is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC has been automatically canceled,
you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the
condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then
press the RES/+ button.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 440 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
441
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving
Press and hold the (interval) button for one
second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on
the multi-information display for two seconds,
and then the mode switches to Cruise and the
Cruise Mode indicator is displayed.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the
button again for one second. ACC Mode
Selected appears on the multi-information
display for two seconds.
■ When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
■
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.
ACC ON
Cruise
Control ON
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 441 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
442
Driving
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•
When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control canceled automatically.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 442 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
443
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Continued
Driving
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your
vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.
The front camera behind the rearview mirror
monitors left and right lane markings (in white
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close
to detected lane markings without a turn
signal activated, the system, in addition to a
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts
you with rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel, to help you remain within the detected
lane.
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure
message appears on the multi-information
display.
If the system determines that its steering input
is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the
roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
■
How the System Works
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
system may not detect all lane markings or lane or
roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on
weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is
always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 445
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 443 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
444
Driving
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the
following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.
Press the RDM button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the multi-
information display when the system is
on.
■
How the System Activates
■
RDM On and Off
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 84
RDM system function can be impacted when the
vehicle is:
•
Not driven within a traffic lane.
•
Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
•
Driven in a narrow lane.
1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the
customized options using the multi-information
display, the system does not operate the steering
wheel and braking.
RDM Button
Indicator
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 444 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
445
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Continued
Driving
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
■
RDM Conditions and Limitations
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 445 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
446
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 446 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
447
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 88
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent
correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 452
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
() If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS
alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
■
LKAS camera
Monitors the lane
lines.
■
Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel
and a warning display alert you that the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
■
Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and
right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to
either of the lane lines.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 447 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
448
Driving
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
■
Lane Keep Support Function
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
The LKAS may not function as designed on while
driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads
with sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected,
system will recover automatically.
■
Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 448 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
449
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
■ How to activate the system
1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the multi-information
display.
The system is ready to use.
2. Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the multi-
information display.
The system is activated.
■
When the System can be Used
1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 449 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
450
Driving
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you turn the
power system off, even if you turned it on the
last time you drove the vehicle.
■
To cancel
1When the System can be Used
The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to
detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines
again, it comes back on automatically.
1To cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 450 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
451
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
■ The system operation is suspended if
you:
• Set the wipers to continuous operation.
u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
• Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the
wipers operate continuously.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
or operate intermittently.
• Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40
mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45
mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the
LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.
■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is quickly turned.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
When the LKAS is suspended,
the lane lines on the multi-
information display change to
contour lines, and the beeper
sounds.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
All models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 451 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
452
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• The ABS or VSA system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
■
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 452 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
453
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 453 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
454
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating motor output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
motor does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■
VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size
are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type
of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 454 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
455
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially turn the VSA features on and off,
press and hold it until you hear a beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning,
allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low
speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come
on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)
button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you turn the
power system on, even if you press the
button the last time you drove the vehicle.
■
VSA® OFF Button
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
With the button pressed, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA®
traction and stability enhancement becomes less
effective.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the button pressed.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the button
pressed if you are not able to free it without.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
press the button again. We do not recommend
driving your vehicle with the button pressed
(indicator on).
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after turning the power
system on or while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF Indicator
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 455 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
456
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
Driving
LaneWatch
TM
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas
displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the
passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas
and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the
passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while
driving.
1LaneWatch
TM
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
•
Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
•
Your tires are over or under inflated.
•
Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
1 2
Camera
Audio/Information Screen
Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.
Press the LaneWatch
button.
Pull the turn signal
lever back.
Press the LaneWatch
button again.
The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.
The system activates when you:
The system deactivates when you:
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 456 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
457
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
Driving
■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen
*
or
audio/information touch screen
*
.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Display Time after Turn off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch display time
after you pull the turn signal lever back.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 295, 314
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 188
■ Reference Lines
Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.
1LaneWatch
TM
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen look slightly
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in
(R.
For proper LaneWatch operation:
•
The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
•
Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
•
Do not touch the camera lens.
2
3
1
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
•
The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
•
The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 457 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
458
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on and a message to appear on the multi-information display.
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 516
Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
• The shift lever is in
(P.
• The power mode is in ON.
■
TPMS Calibration
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
•
Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
•
Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 516
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
•
You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
•
You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
•
Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
•
There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than
the condition at calibration.
•
Snow chains are used.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 458 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
459
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
You can calibrate the system from the
customized features on the multi-information
display.
1. Press the / button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select Cancel or Calibrate.
3. Press the / button and select
Calibrate, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
• If the Calibration Failed to Start message
appears, repeat steps 2-3.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
1TPMS Calibration
•
The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
•
During this period, if the power mode is set to ON
and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds,
you may notice the low tire pressure indicator
comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that
the calibration process is not yet complete.
You can calibrate the system using the audio/
information screen
*
or audio/information touch
screen
*
.
2 Customized Features P. 295, 314
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
4
4
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 459 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
460
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 460 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
461
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 461 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
462
uuWhen DrivinguHigh Voltage Battery
Driving
High Voltage Battery
The High Voltage battery gradually discharges even if the vehicle is not in use. As a
result, if your vehicle is parked for an extended period of time, the battery charge
level will become low. Extended periods of time at a low state of charge will shorten
battery life. To maintain the battery state of charge, drive your vehicle for more than
30 minutes at least once every three months.
Extreme high temperatures can affect the battery life. You can minimize the effects
by parking the vehicle in the shade during the summer.
1High Voltage Battery
Be careful not to let the High Voltage battery drain
too much. If the battery level becomes close to zero,
it will make it impossible to start the engine.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 462 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
463
Continued
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.
To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.
■
Parking Brake
1Brake System
When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a
whirling sound from the motor compartment. This is
because the brake system is in operation, and it is
normal.
1Parking Brake
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release
Parking Brake appears on the multi-information
display.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 463 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBrakinguBrake System
464
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 466
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 465
■
Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply regenerative braking by taking
your foot off the accelerator pedal and shifting to .
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a
motor sound coming from the engine compartment
while the brake system activates. This is normal.
B
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 464 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
465
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■
ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
•
When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
•
When snow chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after turning the power
system on or while driving. This is normal.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 465 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
466
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
■
Brake Assist System
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 466 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
467
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
■ How the system works
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBS
TM
is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor
stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBS
TM
may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 471
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly
impacted.
1How the system works
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you
when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph
(30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle
detected in front of you.
When the CMBS
TM
activates, it may automatically
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.
The radar sensor is
at the lower part of
the front bumper.
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3
mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
When to use
The CMBS
TM
activates when:
●
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected
in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a
collision.
●
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a
collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 467 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
468
Driving
■ When the system activates
At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multi-
information display setting options.
2 List of customizable options P. 111
■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel
When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the
system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and
audible alerts.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the
steering wheel, etc.).
1When the system activates
The camera in the CMBS
TM
is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 471
The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front
end of the dashboard.
Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.
Lens
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and
stops if the collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Beep
Head-up
Warning
Lights
Visual Alerts
Audible Alert
Tactile Alert
1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric
power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator P. 79
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 468 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
469
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBS
TM
may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
■
Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBS
TM
The radar sensor
detects a vehicle
Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering Wheel Braking
Stage
one
There is a risk of a
collision with the
vehicle ahead of you.
When in Long, visual and audible alerts
come on at a longer distance from a
vehicle ahead than in Normal setting,
and in Short, at a shorter distance than
in Normal.
In case of an
oncoming vehicle
detected, rapid
vibration is
provided.
—
Stage
two
The risk of a collision
has increased, time to
respond is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts. —
Lightly
applied
Stage
three
The CMBS
TM
determines that a
collision is
unavoidable.
Forcefully
applied
Your Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Normal
ShortLong
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 469 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
470
Driving
Press this button until the beeper sounds to
switch the system on or off.
When the CMBS
TM
is off:
• The CMBS
TM
indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
• A message on the multi-information display
reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBS
TM
is in the previously selected ON or
OFF setting each time you turn the power
system on.
■
CMBS
TM
On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut off, and the
CMBS
TM
indicator will come and stay on under certain
conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 471
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 470 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
471
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBS
TM
indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the CMBS
TM
functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between objects and the background.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
■
CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 471 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
472
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
• When tire chains are installed.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 472 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
473
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
■ Automatic shutoff
The CMBS may automatically shut itself off and the CMBS indicator comes and stays
on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused the CMBS to shut off improve or are addressed
(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 473 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
474
Driving
The CMBS
TM
may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
■ When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
■ At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
■ On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
■ Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when
parking, stationary vehicles and walls.
■
With Little Chance of a Collision
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
For the CMBS
TM
to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the
CMBS
TM
off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
•
The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
•
You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
•
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 474 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
475
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Move the shift lever from
(D to (P.
4. Turn off the power system.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the driveline:
•
Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
•
Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
When facing uphill, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
Doing so may cause the power system to overheat
and fail.
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 475 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
476
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
Parking Sensor System
*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the
beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance
between your vehicle and the obstacle.
■ The sensor location and range
1Parking Sensor System
*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
•
The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
dirt.
•
The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
•
The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
•
The system is affected by devices that emit
ultrasonic waves.
•
Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:
•
Thin or low objects.
•
Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
•
Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less
Front Corner Sensors
Rear Corner Sensors
Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less
Rear Center Sensors
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 476 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
477
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
■ Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the
parking sensor system button to turn on or off
the system. The indicator in the button comes
on when the system is on.
The rear center and corner sensors start to
detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in
(R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The front corner sensors start to detect an
obstacle when the shift lever is in any position
other than
(P, and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
1Parking Sensor System
*
When you set the power mode to ON, the system will
be in the previously selected condition.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 477 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
478
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
■ When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes
shorter
*1:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
Length of the
intermittent beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Indicator Audio/information screen
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Moderate —
Rear: About 43-24 in
(110-60 cm)
Blinks in Yellow
*1
Short
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
Blinks in Amber
Very short
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
Continuous
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
Blinks in Red
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 478 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
479
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button blinks.
u The beeper sounds once.
4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds
three times when the rear sensors come back on.
■
Turning off All Rear Sensors
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you shift to
(R, the indicator in the parking
sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the
rear sensors have been turned off.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 479 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
480
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.
■
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 295
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into
(R.
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.
Top Down View Mode
Normal View Mode
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 480 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
481
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Driving
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.
Press the selector knob to switch the angle.
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.
: Wide view
: Normal view
: Top down view
If the last used viewing mode is Wide view or Normal view, the same mode is
selected the next time you shift into
(R. If Top down view was last used, Wide view
mode is selected.
If you shift out of
(R in Top down view mode, then shift into (R again 10 seconds
later, Wide view mode is selected.
Models with one display
Models with two displays
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 481 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
482
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■ Fuel tank capacity: 14.8 US gal (56 liters)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 482 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
483
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the power system.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the driver’s seat.
u The fuel fill door opens.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening
it until you hear it click at least once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Turn the power system off, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Push
Cap
Cap
Holder
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 483 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
484
Driving
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO
2
emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
multi-information display.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100 Liter
Kilometers L per 100 km
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 484 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
485
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 486
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 487
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 488
Maintenance Minder
TM
..................... 489
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 493
Opening the Hood ........................... 494
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 495
Oil Check......................................... 496
Adding Engine Oil............................ 497
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 498
Cooling System................................ 500
Inverter Coolant............................... 502
Transmission Fluid............................ 503
Brake Fluid....................................... 504
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 505
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 506
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 514
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 516
Tire and Loading Information Label...... 517
Tire Labeling .................................... 517
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......519
Wear Indicators ............................... 521
Tire Service Life................................ 521
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 522
Tire Rotation.................................... 523
Winter Tires ..................................... 524
12-Volt Battery ................................. 525
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 526
Climate Control System Maintenance... 527
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 528
Exterior Care.................................... 530
Accessories and Modifications ........ 533
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 485 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
486
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake Fluid P. 504
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 516
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 506
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 514
■
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the multi-information display (MID).
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 491
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 573
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 486 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
487
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the 12-volt battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt
battery or compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Operate operate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the power system is turned off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the power system including the engine and exhaust system
cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not activate the power system unless instructed, and keep your hands and
limbs away from moving parts. When the power system is on, the engine can
automatically start, or the radiator fan may start operating without the engine
running.
■
Maintenance Safety
■
Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 487 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
488
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 488 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
489
Continued
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder
TM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the multi-information display every time you set the power mode to ON.
The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
To Use Maintenance Minder
TM
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the (Information) button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears
on the multi-information display.
■
Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0
Button
Maintenance
Item Codes
Remaining
Engine Oil
Life
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 489 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
490
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to
6 percent. Once you switch the
display by pressing the
(Information) button, this message
will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life, and the maintenance
items should be inspected and serviced
soon.
Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent. Press the button to
switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached the
end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a negative
distance appears after driving over
10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another
display.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 490 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
491
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•
Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
•
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
•
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder
Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
*1: If a message Service does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
B
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
●
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
●
Check parking brake adjustment
●
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●
Inspect suspension components
●
Inspect driveshaft boots
●
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
●
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●
Inspect exhaust system
#
●
Inspect fuel lines and connections
#
●
Check expiration date for TRK bottle
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 47,500 miles (75,000 km) or 3 years.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 491 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
492
Maintenance
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
3. Press the button until Maintenance Reset appears on the display.
4. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
5. Select Reset with the button, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then press the SEL/RESET button.
■
Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
You can reset the engine oil life display using the
audio/information screen
*
or audio/information
touch screen
*
.
2 Customized Features P. 295, 314
Engine Oil Life
SEL/RESET
Button
Maintenance Item Codes
(Information)
Button
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 492 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
493
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
12-Volt Battery
Inverter Coolant
Filler Tank
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 493 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
494
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 494 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
495
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown here.
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
Ambient Temperature
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 495 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
496
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Turn off the power system. You can check the oil level without the engine having
run beforehand. If the engine has been running, wait approximately three minutes
before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 496 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
497
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 497 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
498
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Turning the power system on automatically starts the engine if the High Voltage
battery charge level gauge shows two segments or less.
2 High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge P. 99
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multi-
information display.
1. Remove the engine under cover.
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
3. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into
a suitable container.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Drain Bolt
Washer
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 498 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
499
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.0 US qt (3.8 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
Oil Filter
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 499 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
500
uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System
Maintenance
Cooling System
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■
Reserve Tank
1Cooling System
NOTICE
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 500 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
501
uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to
relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
■
Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Radiator Cap
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 501 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
502
uuMaintenance Under the HooduInverter Coolant
Maintenance
Inverter Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the inverter coolant level every time you refuel. Check
the filler tank. Add the inverter coolant accordingly.
Have a dealer replace the inverter coolant.
1. Make sure the inverter is cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the filler
tank.
3. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
4. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■
Checking the Coolant
1Inverter Coolant
NOTICE
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the motor components.
MAX
MIN
Filler
Tank
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 502 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
503
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
1Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and may
even damage it.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 503 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
504
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Maintenance
Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■
Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
Brake Reservoir
MIN
MAX
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 504 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
505
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears
on the multi-information display.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Canadian models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 505 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
506
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the
upper part of the air intake duct.
2. Remove the reserve tank.
High beam headlight: LED type
*
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
*
Low beam headlight: LED type
*
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)
*
■
High Beam Headlights
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Models with halogen headlights
All models
Models with halogen headlights
1High Beam Headlights
High beam headlights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
Models with LED headlights
Models with halogen headlights
Holding
Clips
Passenger side
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 506 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
507
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
Maintenance
3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
1High Beam Headlights
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Models with halogen headlights
Center pin
Push until the
pin is flat.
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
Both sides
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 507 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Lights
508
Maintenance
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clip and screw, and
pull the inner fender back.
3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Fog Lights
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.
■
Low Beam Headlights
1Low Beam Headlights
Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Models with LED headlights
Models with halogen headlights
Center pin
Push until the
pin is flat.
Models with halogen headlights
Screw
Holding
Clip
Bulb
Coupler
Tab
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 508 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
509
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Turn the steering wheel and pull the inner fender back in the same way as when
replacing the halogen low beam headlight bulbs
*
.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 508
1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Front Turn Signal Lights
Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Front Side Marker Light: 3 CP
Models with LED headlights
Bulb Socket
Models with LED headlights
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 509 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
510
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Turn the steering wheel and pull the inner fender back in the same way as when
replacing the halogen low beam headlight bulbs
*
.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 508
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W (Amber)
Models with halogen headlights
Bulb
Socket
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 510 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
511
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light, and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light, and Rear Side
Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Brake/Taillight: LED
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Light: LED
1Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light, and Rear Side Marker
Light Bulbs
Brake/taillights and rear side marker lights are LED
type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is
flat.
Clip
Push until the
pin is flat.
Holding Clip
Bulb
Socket
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 511 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
512
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2 Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light,
and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
P. 511
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Taillight: LED
1Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Holding Clip
Bulb
Socket
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 512 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
513
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the license plate light assembly by
pushing the left edge of the lens toward the
right and pulling the assembly out.
2. Remove the lens by pushing the tabs.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
Bulb
Tab
Lens
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 513 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
514
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the holder
off the wiper arm.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
Tab
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 514 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
515
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
6. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then
push down the lock tab.
7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Top
Retainer
Blade
Tab
Indent
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 515 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
516
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2
kgf/cm
2
) per month.
■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 521
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm
2
) higher than if
checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 458
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 516 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
517
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Continued
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a
The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b
The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c
The original tire sizes for front and rear.
d
The proper cold tire pressure for front and rear.
Label
Example
Example
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■
Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
225/50R17 94V
225: Tire width in millimeters.
50: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
17: Rim diameter in inches.
94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 517 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
518
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■
Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 518 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
519
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Continued
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■
Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 519 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
520
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■
Traction
■
Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 520 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
521
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of
manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
1Checking Tires
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size 225/50R17 94V
Pressure 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 521 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
522
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 522 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
523
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information
display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 458
FRONT
Direction Mark
Front
Front
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 523 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
524
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 524 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
525
Maintenance
12-Volt Battery
Checking the 12-Volt Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a
sensor located on the negative terminal of the
battery. If there is a problem with this sensor,
the multi-information display will display a
warning message. If this happens, have you
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 187
• The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 118
• The navigation system
*
is disabled.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Charging the 12-Volt Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
112-Volt Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 525 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
526
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 526 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
527
Maintenance
Climate Control System Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance Minder
TM
messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 527 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
528
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may
cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside
the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently
used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
■
Cleaning the Window
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 528 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
529
uuCleaninguInterior Care
Maintenance
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
■
Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
■
Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 529 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
530
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• Turn off the automatic intermittent wipers
*
.
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
■
Washing the Vehicle
■
Using an Automated Car Wash
■
Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 530 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
531
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
■
Applying Wax
■
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■
Cleaning the Window
■
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 531 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
532
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 532 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
533
Maintenance
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 558
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 533 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
534
uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications
Maintenance
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, provincial, territorial, or local regulations.
Do not modify or attempt to repair your vehicle’s high-voltage hybrid power system
or otherwise modify vehicle electrical systems. Disassembling or modifying electrical
equipment can result in a crash or a fire.
If you ever need to replace your vehicle's high-voltage battery assembly outside of
warranty coverage, we highly recommend that you only use a genuine Honda high-
voltage battery assembly. Genuine Honda high-voltage battery assemblies are
designed to work with your vehicle's hybrid power system and have been designed,
engineered and manufactured to avoid overcharging situations. Non-genuine
highvoltage battery assemblies may not have been similarly designed, engineered
and manufactured, and installation of such assemblies could result in overcharging,
fires, loss of power, or other conditions that may increase the likelihood of a crash
or injury.
1Modifications
3
WARNING
Use of improperly designed, engineered or
manufactured high-voltage battery
assemblies could cause a fire in your
vehicle.
A vehicle fire could result in a crash or
injury.
Only use a genuine Honda high-voltage
battery assembly, or its equivalent, in your
vehicle.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 534 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
535
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 536
Power System Won’t Start
Checking the Procedure................... 545
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is
Weak..........................................546
Emergency Power System Off........... 547
Jump Starting.................................... 548
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 550
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 551
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 554
If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 554
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 555
If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On.................................. 556
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On............................556
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 557
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 558
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 560
Emergency Towing........................... 561
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 535 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
536
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
This vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire. If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise
severely damaged, you will need to have the vehicle towed. If the tire only has a
small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can use the temporary tire repair kit so
that you can drive to the nearest service station for a more permanent repair.
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to
(P.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
The kit should not be used in the following situations.
Instead, contact a dealer or roadside assistance to
have the vehicle towed.
•
The tire sealant has expired.
•
More than one tire is punctured.
•
The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).
•
The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
outside the tire contact area.
•
Damage has been caused by driving with the tire
extremely under inflated.
•
The tire bead is no longer seated.
•
The rim is damaged.
Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the
tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be
able to repair the puncture using the kit.
When the puncture is: Kit Use
Smaller than 3/16 inch
(4 mm)
Yes
Larger than 3/16 inch
(4 mm)
No
Contact
Area
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 536 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
537
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2. Take the kit out of the case.
3. Place the kit face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
■
Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the
instruction manual provided with the kit.
In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.
In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.
Instruction Manual
Air Only Hose (Black)
Speed Restriction LabelRepair Notification Label
Pressure Relief
Button
Inflator Switch
Selector Switch
SEALANT/AIR side
Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
AIR ONLY side
Power Plug
Pressure Gauge
Tire Sealant
Expiration Date
U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada
Trunk Floor Lid
Tire Repair Kit
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 537 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
538
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve
stem.
2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the
packaging.
3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire
valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
■
Injecting Sealant and Air
1Injecting Sealant and Air
In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.
In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.
The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other
materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away
any spills immediately.
3
WARNING
Tire sealant contains substances that are
harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.
If accidentally swallowed, do not induce
vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get
medical attention immediately.
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool
water and get medical attention if
necessary.
Valve Stem
Valve Cap
Sealant/Air Hose
Valve Stem
Sealant/Air Hose
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 538 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
539
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory
power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
5. Turn the power system on.
u Keep the power system on while
injecting sealant and air.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 70
6. Turn the selector switch to SEALANT/
AIR.
7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the
compressor.
u The compressor starts injecting sealant
and air into the tire.
8. When the sealant injection is complete,
continue to add air.
9. After the air pressure reaches front: 33 psi
(230 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (225 kPa), turn off
the kit.
u To check the pressure, occasionally turn
off the compressor and read the gauge.
1Injecting Sealant and Air
NOTICE
Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for
more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket
and compressor can overheat and become
permanently damaged.
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure
shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than
actual. After the sealant injection is complete the
pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the
tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately
measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air
compressor off only after the sealant injection is
complete.
If the required air pressure is not reached within 10
minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for
the kit to provide the necessary seal, and your vehicle
will need to be towed.
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause
a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
SEALANT/AIR side
Pressure Gauge
ON
OFF
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 539 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
540
Handling the Unexpected
10. Unplug the power plug from the accessory
power socket.
11. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
12. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns 0 psi (0 kPa).
13. Apply the repair notification label to the
flat surface of the wheel.
u The wheel surface must be clean to
ensure the label adheres properly.
1Injecting Sealant and Air
See a dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and
proper disposal of an empty bottle.
Sealant/Air Hose
Valve Stem
Repair Notification Label
U.S.
Canada
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 540 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
541
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Apply the speed restriction label to the
location as shown.
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
4. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve
stem. Screw it until it is tight.
5. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
u Do not turn the air compressor on to
check the pressure.
2 Inflating An Under-inflated Tire P. 543
■
Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
Stop and recheck the air pressure after every 10
minutes of driving as necessary until you reach the
nearest service station where you are able to have the
tire permanently repaired or replaced.
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
U.S.
Canada
Air Only Hose
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 541 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
542
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
6. If the air pressure is:
• Less than 19 psi (130 kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too severe. Call for help and
have your vehicle towed.
2 Emergency Towing P. 561
• Front: 33 psi (230 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (225 kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you reach the nearest service
station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not
reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.
u If the pressure does not go down after the 10 minute driving, you do not need
to check the pressure any more.
• Greater than 19 psi (130 kPa), but less than front: 33 psi (230 kPa)/rear: 33 psi
(225 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front:
33 psi (230 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (225 kPa).
Then drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service
station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not
reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.
u You should repeat this procedure as long as the air pressure is within this
range.
7. Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
8. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 542 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Continued
543
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
the Flat Tire P. 537
2. Remove the kit from the case.
u Place the kit on flat ground near the tire
to be inflated, away from traffic.
3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
4. Remove the air only hose from the kit.
5. Remove the valve cap.
6. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve
stem. Screw it until it is tight.
■
Inflating An Under-inflated Tire
1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire
NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The accessory
power socket and compressor can overheat and
become permanently damaged.
Air Only Hose
Valve Cap
Valve Stem
Air Only Hose
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 543 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
544
Handling the Unexpected
7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power
socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
8. Turn the power system on.
u Keep the power system on while
injecting sealant and air.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 70
9. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit.
u The compressor starts to inject air into
the tire.
11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
12. Turn off the kit.
u Check the pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
u If overinflated, press the pressure relief
button.
13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
14. Unscrew the air only hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
15. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns 0 psi (0 kPa).
16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
AIR ONLY
side
ON
Pressure Relief Button
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 544 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
545
Handling the Unexpected
Power System Won’t Start
Checking the Procedure
When the READY indicator does not come on and the Ready to Drive message
does not appear on the multi-information display, check the following items and
take appropriate action.
Checklist Condition What to Do
Check if the related
indicator or multi-
information display
messages come on.
The Temperature is Too Cold For Vehicle To Operate
message appears.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 88
The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears.
uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 POWER Button Operating Range P. 141
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 546
The POWER SYSTEM indicator comes on. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Check the brightness
of the interior lights.
The interior lights are dim or do not come on at all. Have the 12-volt battery checked by a dealer.
The interior lights come on normally. Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 560
Check the shift lever
position.
The shift lever is not in (P or (N. Move the shift lever to the (P position.
Check the
immobilizer system
indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the power
system cannot be turned on.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 82
1Checking the Procedure
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 548
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 545 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
546
uuPower System Won’t Start uIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the multi-information display, and the indicator on the POWER button
flashes, the READY indicator does not come on.
Turn on the power system as follows.
1. Touch the center of the POWER button
with the H logo on the smart entry remote
while the indicator on the POWER button is
flashing. The buttons on the smart entry
remote should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the
POWER button within 10 seconds after the
beeper sounds and the indicator stays on.
u The READY indicator comes on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 546 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
547
uuPower System Won’t StartuEmergency Power System Off
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Power System Off
The POWER button may be used to turn the power system off due to an emergency
situation even while driving. If you must turn the power system off, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the POWER button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the POWER button twice.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the power system
disables the power assist the power system provides to the steering and braking
systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow
the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop
immediately in a safe place.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the power system is off.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to
(P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Then press the POWER button twice without depressing the brake pedal.
1Emergency Power System Off
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the power system to be
turned off.
U.S. models
Canadian models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 547 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
548
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the power
system, then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle's 12-volt battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15-
volt. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
■
Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
12-volt battery performance degrades in cold
conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
3
WARNING
A 12-volt battery can explode if you do not
follow the correct procedure, seriously
injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the 12-volt battery.
Booster Battery
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 548 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
549
uuJump Startingu
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's 12-volt battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■
What to Do After the Engine Starts
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 549 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
550
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift
lever into
(N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■
Releasing the Lock
Slot
Cover
Release Button
Shift Lock
Release
Slot
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 550 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
551
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The High Temperature. Power Reduced. message appears on the multi-
information display.
• The Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on the multi-information
display.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
The High Temperature. Power Reduced. message appears on the multi-
information display when the power system temperature is high.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages P. 96
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
u Move the shift lever to (P, and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories
and turn on the hazard warning lights.
2. Keep the power mode on, and wait until the message disappears.
u If the message does not disappear, have your vehicle inspected at a dealer.
■
The High Temperature. Power Reduced. Message Appears
on the Multi-Information Display
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 551 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
552
Handling the Unexpected
■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the power system on and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the power system and wait until it
subsides. Then open the hood.
■
The Engine Temperature Too Hot Message Appears on the
Multi-Information Display
1The Engine Temperature Too Hot Message Appears on the Multi-
Information Display
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the Engine Temperature
Too Hot message on the multi-information display
may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 552 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
553
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Handling the Unexpected
■ Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
turn the power system off once the Engine
Temperature Too Hot message
disappears.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately turn the power system off.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the engine coolant
reserve tank is low, add coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, turn the power system on.
If the Engine Temperature Too Hot message does not appear, resume driving. If
it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.
1The Engine Temperature Too Hot Message Appears on the Multi-
Information Display
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Engine
Coolant
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 553 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
554
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Turn the power system off and let the engine sit for about three
minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Turn the power system on and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Turn the power
off and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the 12-volt battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 554 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
555
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Turn the power system off.
2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
■
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again next
time the engine starts, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 555 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
556
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using regenerative braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn on the power system again.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the transmission.
If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator
come on simultaneously, the electronic brake
distribution system is not working. This can result in
vehicle instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If both red and amber brake system indicators come
on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it
inspected by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 556 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
557
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one
minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible.
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 557 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
558
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, and check
to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Located near the 12-volt battery. Push the
tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
■
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Circuit Protected Amps
1 Battery 150 A
2
EPS 70 A
ESB 40 A
Right EPB
*
(30 A)
Fuse Box Option 1 40 A
Shift By Wire
*
(30 A)
RFC 40 A
IG Main 1 30 A
3
Headlight Low Beam Main 30 A
Engine Electric Water Pump 30 A
IG Main 2 30 A
Wiper Motor 30 A
4 FI Main 15 A
5 PCU Electric Water Pump 7.5 A
6EVTC 20A
7 IG Hold 10 A
8 DBW 15 A
9 IG Coil 15 A
10 Stop Light 10 A
11 VBU 10 A
12
Fuse Box Main 2 60 A
Rear Defogger 50 A
Fuse Box Main 1 60 A
ABS/VSA FSR 40 A
Fuse Box 30 A
ABS/VSA Motor 30 A
Heater Motor 40 A
Left EPB
*
(30 A)
Small Light 20 A
Fuse Box Option 2 40 A
13 A/C PTC 4 (40 A)
14 A/CPTC 2 (40 A)
15 Front Fog Light + DRL (10 A)
16 Horn 10 A
17 IG Hold 3-L/R 15 A
Circuit Protected Amps
18 Interior Light 7.5 A
19 − −
20 Premium Amp
*
(20 A)
21 Back Up 10 A
22 Audio 15 A
23 P-ACT Drive
*
(7.5 A)
24 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A
25 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A
26 IGPS LAF 10 A
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 558 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
559
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
■
Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Label
Circuit Protected Amps
1 A/C 7.5 A
2 DRL 7.5 A
3 − −
4 − −
5 Meter 10 A
6 SRS (7.5 A)
7 Option (7.5 A)
8 − −
9 Fuel Pump 20 A
10 ABS/VSA 7.5 A
11 VB SOL 10 A
12 Front Wiper 7.5 A
13 ACG 10 A
14
Rear Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment)
20 A
15
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining
(20 A)
16 Moonroof
*
(20 A)
17 Front Seat Heaters (20 A)
18 − −
19
Passenger Side Door
Unlock
10 A
20
Driver Side Rear Door
Unlock
10 A
21 Driver’s Door Lock 10 A
22 Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A
23 Driver’s Door Unlock 10 A
24 SRS 10 A
25 Illumination 10 A
26 Key Lock 7.5 A
27 Parking Lights 10 A
28 Lumbar Support (10 A)
29 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
30 Washer 15 A
31 A/C Main 10 A
32 Driver’s Power Window 20 A
Circuit Protected Amps
33
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
20 A
34
Rear Driver Side Power
Window
20 A
35
Rear Passenger Side Power
Window
20 A
36 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding (20 A)
37 ACCESSORY 7.5 A
38 − −
39 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
40
Front Accessory Power
Socket
(Console Panel)
20 A
41 Driver Side Rear Door Lock 10 A
42 Door Lock 20 A
a SMART 10 A
b SHIFTER
*
(7.5 A)
c Hybrid System 10 A
d Hazard 15 A
e
Passenger's Power Seat
Reclining
*
(20 A)
f
Passenger's Power Seat
Sliding
*
(20 A)
g Rear Seat Heaters
*
(15 A)
h ACL
*
(15 A)
i − −
j IG MON
*
7.5 A
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 559 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
560
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories
off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 558 to 559.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Combined
Fuse
Blown Fuse
Screw
Fuse Puller
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 560 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
561
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 561 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
562
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 562 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
563
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 564
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine
Number, and Motor Number........... 566
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 567
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 568
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 569
Warranty Coverages ........................ 571
Authorized Manuals......................... 573
Customer Service Information......... 574
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 563 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
564
Information
Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications
Model Honda Accord Hybrid
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
U.S.: 4,542 lbs (2,060 kg)
Canada: 2,060 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
U.S.: 2,414 lbs (1,095 kg)
Canada: 1,095 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
U.S.: 2,161 lbs (980 kg)
Canada: 980 kg
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 13.6 – 15.3 oz (385 – 435 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL 11
Quantity 7.3 – 8.2 cu-in (120 – 135 cm
3
)
■ Engine Specifications
■ Fuel
■ Washer Fluid
Displacement 126 cu-in (1,993 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs NGK ILZKAR7E11S
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 14.8 US gal (56 ℓ)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.5 ℓ
■ Light Bulbs
*1: Models with halogen headlights
*2: Models with LED headlights
Headlights (Low Beam)
55W (H11)
*1
LED
*2
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
*1
LED
*2
Fog Lights LED
Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker
Lights
*1
28/8 W (Amber)
Front Turn Signal Lights
*2
LED
Front Side Marker Lights
*2
3CP
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors)
LED
Brake/Taillights LED
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Taillights LED
Back-Up Lights 16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Lights 5W
Trunk Light 5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Courtesy Lights 2CP
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 564 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
565
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■ Brake Fluid
■ Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified
Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Capacity Change 2.23 US qt (2.11 ℓ)
■ Engine Oil
■ Engine Coolant
■ Inverter Coolant
Recommended
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 3.7 US qt (3.5 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
4.0 US qt (3.8 ℓ)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.51 US gal (5.71 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.19 US gal (0.71 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
0.31 US gal (1.17 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.08 US gal (0.3 ℓ) in the filler tank)
■ Tire
Regular
Size 225/50R17 94V
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
Front 33 (230 [2.3])
Rear 33 (225 [2.3])
Wheel Size Regular 17 x 7 1/2J
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 565 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
566
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Motor Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and motor number are shown
as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Motor
Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
Motor Number
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 566 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
567
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM*
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
Remote Transmitter
Wireless Charger
*
* Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 567 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
568
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 568 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
569
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness codes, as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle's emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the 12-volt
battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without turning the power
system on. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it
then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes
are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for six hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Turn the power system on.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the 12-volt
battery is disconnected, and set again only after
several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 569 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
570
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
5. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
6. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
7. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for 40 minutes.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 570 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
571
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 571 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
572
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement 12-Volt Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage
for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
■ EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Transportation and Air Quality
Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group
Attn: Warranty Complaints
2000 Traverwood Drive
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
Email: [email protected]
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 572 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
573
Information
Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1-(800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at
www.helminc.com.
■ For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 573 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
574
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
•
Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Motor Number
P. 566
•
Date of purchase
•
Odometer reading of your vehicle
•
Your name, address, and telephone number
•
A detailed description of the problem
•
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 574 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
Index
575
Index
Index
Numbers
12-Volt Battery Charging System
Indicator ........................................... 76, 554
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 465
Accessories and Modifications ................ 533
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 172
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System............ 426
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).......... 85, 429
Additives
Coolant .......................................... 500, 502
Engine Oil ............................................... 495
Washer ................................................... 505
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 495
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 166
Clock ...................................................... 118
Front Seats.............................................. 160
Head Restraints....................................... 163
Mirrors.................................................... 158
Steering Wheel ....................................... 157
Temperature ........................................... 103
Aha
TM
........................................................ 261
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 179
Changing the Mode................................ 179
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 180
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 527
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 179
Sensors.................................................... 182
Synchronized Mode................................. 181
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 179
Air Pressure ....................................... 517, 565
Airbags ........................................................ 45
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 51
After a Collision......................................... 48
Airbag Care............................................... 57
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 48
Indicator.............................................. 55, 78
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 56
Sensors...................................................... 45
Side Airbags .............................................. 52
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 54
AM/FM Radio .................................... 197, 237
Android Auto
TM
........................................ 278
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 465
Indicator.................................................... 78
Apple CarPlay®.......................................... 274
Armrest ..................................................... 166
Audio Remote Controls............................ 188
Audio System ............................................ 184
Adjusting the Sound........................ 195, 230
Audio/Information Screen ................ 191, 214
Audio/Information Touch Screen ............. 216
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 186
Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout .. 219
Closing Apps ........................................... 229
Display Setup................................... 196, 231
Error Messages........................................ 283
General Information ................................ 288
Home Screen........................................... 222
Internet Radio ......................... 205, 259, 261
iPod ........................................ 202, 252, 291
Limitations for Manual
Operation.............................. 232, 341, 374
MP3/WMA/AAC.............. 199, 208, 249, 262
Playing a CD.................................... 199, 249
Recommended CDs................................. 289
Recommended Devices............................ 291
Remote Controls ..................................... 188
Security Code.......................................... 187
Selecting an Audio Source....................... 232
Status Area ............................................. 228
Theft Protection ...................................... 187
USB Flash Drives...................... 208, 262, 291
USB Port.................................................. 185
Wallpaper Setup.............................. 193, 220
Audio/Information Screen ............... 191, 214
Audio/Information Touch Screen ............ 216
Authorized Manuals ................................ 573
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 129
Customize............................... 113, 307, 330
Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support
System).................................................... 147
Indicator.................................................... 83
Automatic Intermittent Wipers............... 152
Automatic Lighting .................................. 145
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 186
Average Fuel Economy ............................ 102
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 575 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
576
Index
Average Fuel Economy Records............... 104
Average Speed.......................................... 103
B
Battery................................................. 11, 525
12-Volt.................................................... 525
12-Volt Battery Charging System
Indicator .................................................. 76
Charging (12-Volt Battery) ....................... 525
High Voltage ..................................... 11, 462
Jump Starting .......................................... 548
Maintenance (Checking the 12-Volt
Battery).................................................. 525
Maintenance (Replacing the Button
Battery).................................................. 526
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 38
Beverage Holders...................................... 171
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 211, 265
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............. 340, 371
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 69
Brake System............................................. 463
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 465
Brake Assist System ................................. 466
Fluid ........................................................ 504
Foot Brake ............................................... 464
Indicator............................................ 74, 556
Parking Brake .......................................... 463
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ................ 74
Brake System Indicator (Red) ..................... 74
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 153
Bulb Replacement .................................... 506
Brake/Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights, and
Rear Side Marker Lights ......................... 511
Fog Lights ............................................... 508
Front Side Marker Lights.......................... 509
Front Turn Signal Lights........................... 509
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights ....... 510
Headlights............................................... 506
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 513
Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 510
Rear License Plate Lights.......................... 513
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 510
Taillights and Back-Up Lights ................... 512
Bulb Specifications ................................... 564
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 70
Cargo Area................................................ 176
Cargo Hook............................................... 175
Carrying Cargo ................................. 411, 413
CD Player........................................... 199, 249
Center Pocket ........................................... 170
Certification Label.................................... 566
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 506
Child Safety................................................. 58
Childproof Door Locks............................. 128
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 133
Child Seat.................................................... 58
Booster Seats ............................................ 69
Child Seat for Infants ................................ 60
Child Seat for Small Children .................... 61
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 65
Larger Children ......................................... 68
Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 60
Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 62
Using a Tether .......................................... 67
Childproof Door Locks............................. 128
Cleaning the Exterior............................... 530
Cleaning the Interior ............................... 528
Climate Control System ........................... 179
Changing the Mode................................ 179
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 180
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 527
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode............ 179
Sensors ................................................... 182
Synchronized Mode ................................ 181
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 179
Clock ......................................................... 118
CMBS
TM
(Collision Mitigation Braking
System
TM
) ................................................ 467
Coat Hook ................................................ 175
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ................................................. 467
Compass.................................................... 406
Console Compartment............................. 169
Controls .................................................... 117
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 576 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
577
Index
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 500
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 501
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 500
Overheating............................................ 551
Coolant (Inverter) .................................... 502
Cooling System......................................... 500
Creeping (Transmission) .......................... 421
Cup Holders.............................................. 171
Customer Service Information ................ 574
Customized Features ............... 108, 295, 314
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 150
Dead Battery (12-Volt)............................. 548
Defaulting All the Settings.............. 313, 337
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows................................................. 180
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 567
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 144
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 158
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 496
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 144
Display Button.................................. 191, 214
Door Mirrors............................................. 159
Doors ........................................................ 120
Auto Door Locking.................................. 129
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 129
Door and Trunk Open Message................. 37
Keys........................................................ 120
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside..................................................... 126
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside.................................................. 122
Lockout Prevention System ...................... 125
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 519
Driving....................................................... 409
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 429
Braking.................................................... 463
Shifting ................................................... 422
Transmission............................................ 421
Turning on the Power.............................. 416
Driving Position Memory System............. 155
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 527
E
Eco Assist® System ...................................... 16
Eco Drive Display ........................................ 17
ECON Button............................................. 424
Elapsed Time............................................. 102
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 79, 556
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 454
Emergency ................................................ 561
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 133
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 569
Engine ....................................................... 566
Coolant ................................................... 500
Jump Starting .......................................... 548
Oil ........................................................... 495
Remote Engine Start................................ 418
Engine Coolant
Adding to the Radiator............................ 501
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 500
Overheating ............................................ 551
Engine Oil ................................................. 495
Adding.................................................... 497
Checking................................................. 496
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 489
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 76, 554
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 495
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System ............................................... 79, 556
EV Button.................................................... 13
EV Indicator ................................................ 75
EV Mode Indicator ..................................... 75
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon
Monoxide)................................................. 70
Expanded View Driver’s Mirror ............... 159
Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 530
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 159
F
Features .................................................... 183
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 527
Oil........................................................... 498
Flat Tire..................................................... 536
Floor Mats................................................. 529
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 577 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
578
Index
Fluids
Brake....................................................... 504
Engine Coolant........................................ 500
Inverter Coolant....................................... 502
Transmission............................................ 503
Windshield Washer.................................. 505
FM/AM Radio .................................... 197, 237
Foot Brake................................................. 464
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 48
Front Seats
Adjusting................................................. 160
Front Sensor Camera ................................ 427
Fuel...................................................... 28, 482
Economy ................................................. 484
Gauge ....................................................... 98
Instant Fuel Economy............................... 103
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Range...................................................... 102
Recommendation .................................... 482
Refueling................................................. 482
Fuel Economy............................................ 484
Fuel Fill Cap......................................... 28, 483
Message.................................................. 555
Fuel Fill Door....................................... 28, 483
Fuses .......................................................... 558
Inspecting and Changing......................... 560
Locations ......................................... 558, 559
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 484
Gauge....................................................... 98
Information ............................................. 482
Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 103
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Refueling................................................. 482
Gauges ........................................................ 98
Glass (care)........................................ 528, 531
Glove Box.................................................. 169
H
Halogen Bulbs .......................................... 506
Handling the Unexpected........................ 535
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 340, 371
Auto Answer........................................... 355
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History.................................... 357, 385
Automatic Transferring............................ 355
Displaying Messages................................ 400
Displaying Text Messages ........................ 368
HFL Buttons..................................... 340, 371
HFL Menus ...................................... 342, 375
HFL Status Display ........................... 341, 373
In Case of Emergency.............................. 404
Limitations for Manual Operation .... 341, 374
Making a Call.................................. 361, 393
Options During a Call ...................... 366, 397
Phone Setup.................................... 347, 380
Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 389
Receiving a Call............................... 365, 396
Receiving a Text Message........................ 367
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ............. 398
Ring Tone ....................................... 356, 384
Selecting a Mail Account......................... 399
Speed Dial ...................................... 358, 386
To Create a Security PIN.......................... 354
To Set Up Text Message Options............. 352
To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options .. 383
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
HD Radio
TM
............................................... 237
Head Restraints ........................................ 163
Headlights ................................................ 144
Aiming.................................................... 506
Auto High-Beam ..................................... 147
Automatic Operation .............................. 145
Dimming......................................... 144, 150
Operating ............................................... 144
Heaters (Seat)................................... 177, 178
High Beam Indicator.................................. 81
High Voltage Battery............................... 462
Hill Start Assist System............................. 420
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ........... 338
HondaLink® .............................................. 267
Hybrid Vehicle
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi Mode
Drive) ...................................................... 10
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 578 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
579
Index
I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Motor................................... 566
Vehicle Identification............................... 566
Illumination Control
Knob ...................................................... 153
Immobilizer System.................................. 134
Indicator ................................................... 82
Indicators.................................................... 74
12-Volt Battery Charging System ...... 76, 554
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber) .... 85
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Green) ........................................... 85, 430
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 78
Auto High-Beam (Green)........................... 83
Brake System (Amber)............................... 74
Brake System (Red) ................................... 74
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ................................................ 87
ECON Mode ..................................... 83, 424
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System ............................................ 79, 556
EV............................................................. 75
EV Mode................................................... 75
Fog Light .................................................. 81
High Beam................................................ 81
Immobilizer System ................................... 82
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Amber) .................................................. 86
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Green) ........................................... 86, 449
Lights On................................................... 81
Low Fuel.................................................... 78
Low Oil Pressure ................................ 76, 554
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 80, 458, 460
Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 76, 555
Parking Brake and Brake System ........ 74, 556
POWER SYSTEM ........................................ 75
READY ...................................................... 75
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).............. 84
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 39, 77
Security System Alarm ............................... 82
Shift Lever Position .................................... 77
Smart Entry System.................................... 83
SPORT Mode ..................................... 77, 425
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 55, 78
System Message ........................................ 81
Transmission.............................................. 77
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 81
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System............................................. 79, 454
VSA® OFF .......................................... 79, 455
Information............................................... 563
Instant Fuel Economy ............................... 103
Instrument Panel ........................................ 73
Brightness Control................................... 153
Interior Lights ........................................... 167
Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 158
Inverter Coolant ....................................... 502
iPod ................................................... 202, 252
J
Jump Starting ........................................... 548
K
Key Number Tag....................................... 121
Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 125
Keys........................................................... 120
Lockout Prevention.................................. 125
Number Tag............................................ 121
Rear Door Won’t Open............................ 128
Remote Engine Start................................ 418
Remote Transmitter................................. 124
Types and Functions................................ 120
Valet Key................................................. 132
Kickdown (Transmission) ......................... 421
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)......... 447
LaneWatch
TM
............................................ 456
Language (HFL) ................................ 341, 373
LATCH (Child Seats).................................... 63
Lights................................................. 144, 506
Auto High-Beam ..................................... 147
Automatic............................................... 145
Bulb Replacement ................................... 506
Daytime Running Lights........................... 150
Fog Lights ............................................... 146
High Beam Indicator.................................. 81
Interior.................................................... 167
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 579 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
580
Index
Light Switches ......................................... 144
Lights On Indicator .................................... 81
Turn Signals............................................. 144
Load Limits................................................ 413
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 120
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 129
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 128
From Inside.............................................. 126
From Outside........................................... 122
Keys ........................................................ 120
Using a Key ............................................. 125
Lockout Prevention System...................... 125
Low Battery Charge (12-Volt) .................. 554
Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 78
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 76, 554
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength................................................... 121
Lower Anchors............................................ 63
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit).............. 413
M
Maintenance............................................. 485
12-Volt Battery ........................................ 525
Brake Fluid............................................... 504
Cleaning.................................................. 528
Climate Control System ........................... 527
Coolant ........................................... 500, 502
Maintenance Minder
TM
............................ 489
Oil ........................................................... 496
Precautions.............................................. 486
Radiator .................................................. 501
Remote Transmitter................................. 526
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 506
Safety...................................................... 487
Service Items ........................................... 491
Tires ........................................................ 516
Transmission Fluid ................................... 503
Under the Hood ...................................... 493
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 76, 555
Map Lights................................................ 168
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 413
Meters, Gauges........................................... 98
Mirrors ...................................................... 158
Adjusting ................................................ 158
Door ....................................................... 159
Exterior ................................................... 159
Interior Rearview ..................................... 158
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 533
Moonroof ................................................. 140
Motor Number ......................................... 566
MP3 ................................... 199, 208, 249, 262
Multi-Information Display ....................... 100
Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 480
N
Numbers (Identification).......................... 566
O
Odometer ................................................. 102
Oil (Engine) .............................................. 495
Adding ................................................... 497
Checking ................................................ 496
Displaying Oil Life ................................... 489
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 76, 554
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 495
Viscosity.................................................. 495
Open Source Licences .............................. 294
Opening/Closing
Hood ...................................................... 494
Moonroof ............................................... 140
Power Windows...................................... 137
Trunk...................................................... 130
Outside Temperature Display ................. 103
Overheating ............................................. 551
P
Pandora® .......................................... 207, 259
Panic Mode............................................... 136
Parking ..................................................... 475
Parking Brake........................................... 463
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator ........................................... 74, 556
Parking Sensor System............................. 476
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator....... 56
Passing Indicators..................................... 144
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ............... 211, 265
POWER Button ......................................... 141
Power System
Turning on.............................................. 416
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 580 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
581
Index
POWER SYSTEM Indicator ......................... 75
Power Windows ....................................... 137
POWER/CHARGE Gauge ............................ 99
Precautions While Driving
Rain ........................................................ 421
Pregnant Women....................................... 43
Puncture (Tire) ......................................... 536
R
Radiator.................................................... 501
Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 197, 237
Radio (SiriusXM®)..................................... 241
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 198, 240
Range........................................................ 102
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 198, 240
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 569
READY Indicator ........................................ 75
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button..................................................... 154
Rear Seat Heaters..................................... 178
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 158
Refueling .................................................. 482
Fuel Gauge ............................................... 98
Gasoline ......................................... 482, 564
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 78
Regulations .............................. 460, 519, 567
Remote Engine Start................................ 418
Remote Transmitter................................. 124
Replacement
Battery.................................................... 526
Bulbs ....................................................... 506
Fuses ............................................... 558, 559
Tires ........................................................ 522
Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 514
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 568
Resetting a Trip Meter ............................. 102
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).......... 443
Indicator.................................................... 84
On and Off.............................................. 444
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 33
Safety Check ............................................... 37
Safety Labels ............................................... 71
Safety Message ............................................. 1
Seat Belts..................................................... 38
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor .................. 42
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 40
Checking................................................... 44
Fastening................................................... 41
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt.......................................................... 65
Pregnant Women ...................................... 43
Reminder................................................... 39
Warning Indicator................................ 39, 77
Seat Heaters...................................... 177, 178
Seats .......................................................... 160
Adjusting................................................. 160
Front Seats .............................................. 160
Seat Heaters .................................... 177, 178
Security System......................................... 134
Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 82
Security System Alarm Indicator................. 82
SEL/RESET Button ..................................... 101
Selecting a Child Seat................................. 62
Selector Knob (Audio).............................. 190
Shift Lever........................................... 27, 422
Operation.......................................... 27, 423
Releasing................................................. 550
Won’t Move............................................ 550
Shift Lever Position Indicator ............ 77, 423
Shift Lever Positions................................. 422
Shifting (Transmission)............................. 422
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 42
Side Airbags................................................ 52
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 54
Siri® Eyes Free ........................................... 282
SiriusXM® Radio........................................ 241
Smart Entry Remote................................. 418
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System ..................................................... 122
Snow Tires................................................. 524
Song By Voice
TM
(SBV).............................. 255
Spark Plugs ............................................... 564
Specifications............................................ 564
Specified Fuel ................................... 482, 564
Speedometer .............................................. 98
SPORT Mode ............................................. 425
SPORT Mode Indicator ....................... 77, 425
SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 48
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 581 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
582
Index
Steering Wheel
Adjusting................................................. 157
Stopping.................................................... 475
Summer Tires ............................................ 524
Sunglasses Holder..................................... 176
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........ 48
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................. 4, 5, 141
SYNC Mode ............................................... 181
System Message Indicator.......................... 81
T
Temperature
Outside Temperature Display ................... 103
Temperature Sensor ......................... 103, 182
Time (Adjusting) ....................................... 118
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)...................................................... 458
Indicator............................................ 80, 557
Tire Repair Kit ........................................... 537
Tires ........................................................... 516
Air Pressure ..................................... 517, 565
Checking and Maintaining....................... 516
Inspection................................................ 516
Labeling................................................... 517
Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 536
Regulations.............................................. 519
Rotation .................................................. 523
Summer................................................... 524
Tire Chains .............................................. 524
Tire Repair Kit.......................................... 537
Wear Indicators ....................................... 521
Winter..................................................... 524
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 415
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 415
Emergency .............................................. 561
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System).................................................... 458
Indicator............................................ 80, 557
Transmission ..................................... 421, 422
Creeping ................................................. 421
Fluid........................................................ 503
Kickdown................................................ 421
Operating the Shift Lever......................... 423
Shift Lever Position Indicator.............. 77, 423
Shifting ................................................... 422
Trip Meter................................................. 102
Troubleshooting....................................... 535
Blown Fuse...................................... 558, 559
Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 31
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 32
Emergency Towing.................................. 561
Noise When Braking.................................. 32
Overheating ............................................ 551
Power System Won’t Start....................... 545
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 536
Rear Door Won’t Open...................... 31, 128
Shift Lever Won’t Move........................... 550
Warning Indicators .................................... 74
Trunk......................................................... 130
Lid........................................................... 130
Light Bulb ............................................... 564
Main Switch............................................ 132
Turn Signals.............................................. 144
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 81
Turn-by-Turn Directions .......................... 103
Turning on the Power ............................. 416
Does Not Activate ................................... 545
Jump Starting ......................................... 548
Remote Engine Start ............................... 418
U
Unlocking the Doors ................................ 122
Unlocking the Front Doors from the
Inside......................................................... 21
USB Flash Drives ....................... 208, 262, 291
USB Port.................................................... 185
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System..................................................... 122
V
Valet Key .................................................. 132
Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 7
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 566
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) ................. 454
OFF Button ............................................. 455
Off Indicator ............................................. 79
System Indicator ....................................... 79
Ventilation ............................................... 179
Viscosity (Oil).................................... 495, 565
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 582 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
583
Index
Voice Control Operation ......................... 233
Audio Commands................................... 235
Climate Control Commands.................... 236
General Commands ................................ 236
Music Search Commands........................ 236
On Screen Commands ............................ 236
Phone Commands .................................. 235
Useful Commands .................................. 235
Voice Portal Screen ................................. 234
Voice Recognition ................................... 233
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) ................. 454
W
Wallpaper......................................... 193, 220
Warning and Information Messages ........ 88
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 554
Warning Labels .......................................... 71
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 571
Watts ........................................................ 564
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 521
Wi-Fi Connection ..................................... 272
Window Washers ..................................... 151
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 505
Switch .................................................... 151
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 137
Windshield ............................................... 151
Cleaning ......................................... 528, 531
Defrosting/Defogging ............................. 180
Washer Fluid........................................... 505
Wiper Blades ........................................... 514
Wipers and Washers................................ 151
Winter Tires
Snow Tires............................................... 524
Tire Chains .............................................. 524
Wipers and Washers................................. 151
Automatic Intermittent Wipers................. 152
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 514
Wireless Charger....................................... 173
WMA ................................. 199, 208, 249, 262
Worn Tires................................................. 516
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 583 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分
